JP6076295B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs variable display of symbols.

  Conventionally, when game data is acquired based on a start winning prize, and a jackpot determination is performed based on the game data, whether or not a jackpot is determined, a symbol change display is performed after the symbol variation display is performed. When a symbol indicating a jackpot is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game is executed (see Patent Document 1).

  For example, when the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is awarded a start during a variable display, game data acquired based on the start winning is stored, and a variable display of symbols based on the game data is suspended. In this way, when the symbol variation display is suspended, a prior determination is made as to whether or not a big hit is made based on the game data related to the retained symbol variation display, and the prior determination is performed. There is a case where a pre-reading effect that suggests a big win is executed based on the result.

  Further, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is set to an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state after the big hit game. For this advantageous gaming state, a prescribed number of symbol variation display that can be executed is set, and if the symbol variation display is executed a prescribed number of times without winning a big win after being set to the advantageous gaming state, The advantageous gaming state ends.

Japanese Patent No. 5162528

  Since the prescribed number of times is set for the advantageous gaming state, even if the advantageous gaming state is set, if the symbol variation display is executed the prescribed number of times without winning a big win, the advantageous gaming state is terminated. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player will be discouraged and willing to diminish the game due to the end of the advantageous gaming state.

  In view of the above background, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in a player's willingness to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a game data acquisition means for acquiring game data when the start condition (the first start port detection sensor 6a or the second start port detection sensor 7a detects the entry of a game ball) is established. The main CPU 101a), the game data storage means (main RAM 101c) for storing the game data acquired by the game data acquisition means, and the game stored in the game data storage means when the determination condition is satisfied Based on the data, special game determination means (main CPU 101a) for determining whether or not to perform a special game (a jackpot game) that gives a predetermined profit to the player (a jackpot determination), and before the determination condition is satisfied In addition, on the basis of the game data acquired by the game data acquisition means, prior determination means (measuring whether or not to perform the special game in advance) When the determination by the CPU 101a) and the special game determination means is performed, the display means (image display device 14) performs variable display of the identification symbol, and variable display for stopping the identification symbol indicating the result of the determination. Display control means (sub CPU102a), notice effect control means (sub CPU102a) for performing a notice effect suggesting that the special game is to be performed based on the result of the determination by the prior determination means, and the special game When the display of the identification symbol indicating the result of the determination to be performed is performed, the special game control means (main CPU 101a) for performing the special game, and the normal game state (low probability game state and Special gaming state setting that sets a specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and short-time gaming state) that is advantageous to the player compared to non-short-time gaming state) In the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state is terminated when the number of times that the variable display control means performs the variable display of the identification symbol reaches a predetermined number in the specific gaming state. Means (main CPU 101a), and the notice effect control means includes a predetermined period in a predetermined period after the stop of variable display of the identification symbol that triggers the specific game state end means to end the specific game state. than the period other than the period, Ri executable der the prediction effect with high probability, (FIG. 122 (h), FIG. 126 (h)) in a period other than the predetermined period, performing a first announcement attraction On the other hand, in the predetermined period, a second notice effect different from the first notice effect is executed .

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in player's willingness to play.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a perspective view showing a mode that the 2nd big prize opening was opened. It is a fragmentary perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram of a gaming machine. (A-1) is a diagram representing a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol, (a-2) is a diagram representing a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol, and (b-1) is a first reach determination table. The figure to represent, (b-2) is a figure showing a 2nd reach determination table. (A) is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for jackpot winning, (b) is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for small wins, (c) is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for lose with reach, (D) is a figure showing the special symbol determination table for lose without reach. (A) is a figure showing a big hit game control table, (b) is a figure showing a small hit game control table. (A) is a figure showing the 1st big hit game big prize opening / closing control table, (b) is a figure showing the 2nd big hit game big prize opening / closing control table. (A) is a diagram showing a third jackpot gaming big prize opening / closing control table, (b) is a diagram showing a fourth jackpot gaming big prize opening / closing control table, and (c) is a jackpot gaming big prize opening / closing control table. It is a figure showing a control table. It is a figure showing the post-special game determination table. It is a figure showing the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table in a normal period. It is a figure showing the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table in a 1st specific period and a 2nd specific period. It is a figure showing the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table in a 3rd specific period. (A) is a diagram representing a normal symbol hit determination table, (b) is a diagram representing a normal symbol determination table, (c) is a regular variation pattern determination table, (d) is an auxiliary game reference data determination table. (E) is a figure showing an auxiliary game control table, (f) is a figure showing a 2nd starting opening-and-closing control table. (A) is a figure showing the structure of the special symbol reservation storage area of the main RAM 101c, (b) is a figure showing the structure of each memory | storage part of a special symbol reservation storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the input control process in a main control board. (A) is a flowchart which shows the 1st starting port detection signal input process in a main control board, (b) is a flowchart which shows the 2nd starting port detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prior determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the winning gate detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the specific area detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit game process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special game completion | finish process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the common figure normal power control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol memory | storage determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol stop process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the auxiliary | assistant game process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows to the middle of the command analysis process in an effect control board. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the command analysis process of FIG. 40. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure reservation number addition process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st look-ahead effect determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol stop display pattern determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure reservation number subtraction process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the change effect pattern determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the specific chance production | presentation determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special notice effect determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special notice effect determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation mode remaining frequency display process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st effect mode setting process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetch effect determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetch effect determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special game effect pattern determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure reservation display mode change process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the specific area passage process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect pattern determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure reservation effect control process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the effect button effect control process in an effect control board. (A) is a diagram showing the configuration of the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 102c, (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the jackpot effect symbol data storage area, (c) is a diagram of each storage unit of the effect information storage area It is a figure showing a structure. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure pending | holding display final mode determination table in a non-time-short play state. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure holding | maintenance display last aspect determination table in a time saving state. It is a figure showing an example of a special figure suspension display special mode transition pattern determination table. It is a figure showing an example of a special figure suspension display special mode transition pattern determination table. It is a figure showing an example of the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table in a non-time-short play state. It is a figure showing an example of the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table in a time-saving play state. It is a figure showing an example of the variation production pattern determination table of the production mode A. It is a figure showing an example of the variation production pattern determination table of the production mode A. It is a figure showing an example of the variation production pattern determination table of the production mode B. It is a figure showing an example of the variation production pattern determination table of the production mode C. It is a figure showing an example of the variation production pattern determination table of the production mode E. It is a figure showing an example of the variation production pattern determination table of the production mode E. (A) is a table showing the correspondence between the special effect symbol and the suggested content of the symbol, (b) is a table showing the correspondence between the appearance symbol pattern and the special effect symbol, (c) is the appearance order pattern and the special effect. It is a table | surface showing the correspondence with the appearance order of a symbol. It is a figure showing an example of the appearance symbol pattern determination table in the case of a loss. It is a figure showing an example of the appearance symbol pattern determination table in the case of a big hit or a small hit. It is a figure showing an example of an appearance order pattern determination table. It is a figure showing an example of the 1st special notice effect execution judgment table. (A) is a figure showing an example of a connection location determination table, (b) is a figure showing an example of a pseudo | simulation continuous level determination table. It is a figure showing an example of a lock level determination table. It is a figure showing an example of the 2nd special notice effect execution judgment table. It is a figure showing an example of a serif pattern judgment table. It is a figure showing an example of a production button normal production control table. It is a figure showing an example of the production mode E end determination table. (A) is a figure showing an example of a special figure reservation display special mode 1st determination table, (b) is a figure showing an example of a special figure reservation display special aspect 2nd determination table. (A) is a figure showing an example of a special figure reservation display special mode 3rd determination table, (b) is a figure showing an example of a special figure reservation display special aspect 4th determination table. It is a figure showing the production | presentation content and suggestion content of a special figure hold display special aspect. It is a figure showing an example of a special figure suspension display special mode transition pattern determination table. (A) is a figure showing an example of the special game effect pattern determination table in effect modes A and D, (b) is a figure showing an example of the special game effect pattern determination table in effect modes B and C. FIG. 45 shows an example of a special game effect pattern determination table in effect mode E. (A) is a figure showing an example of an ending effect pattern determination table, (b) is a figure showing an example of the effect mode determination table after special game. It is a figure showing the schematic of a game flow. It is a figure showing the specific example of a game flow. It is a figure showing the time chart of the 2nd big hit game and the small hit game and the special game production which relates to those games. It is a figure showing the flow of the special game effect in a 2nd big hit game and a small hit game. (A) is a figure showing the outline of the development pattern of the change effect in effect mode A and effect mode E, (b) is a figure showing the effect flow of the SPSP reach effect of the change effect in effect mode A and effect mode E. It is a figure showing the flow of specific chance production. (A) is a figure showing the image of production | presentation symbol unit display, (b) is a figure showing the development flow of count lock production, (c) is a figure showing the production flow of the 1st special notice production. (A) is a figure showing the specific example of the production mode transition transition at the time of winning the jackpot 3, (b) is a figure showing the concrete example of the presentation mode transition transition at the time of winning the jackpot 1. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of an image displayed on the image display device in the effect mode B, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of an image displayed on the image display device in the effect mode C. It is a figure showing the specific example of effect condition satisfaction frequency display and jackpot effect symbol history display. It is a figure showing the specific example of effect condition satisfaction frequency display and jackpot effect symbol history display. It is a figure showing the specific example of effect condition satisfaction frequency display and jackpot effect symbol history display. It is a figure showing the specific example of effect condition satisfaction frequency display and jackpot effect symbol history display. (A) is a diagram showing a stop display of an effect design that suggests winning of a jackpot 2 or a jackpot, (b) is a diagram showing an introduction effect of a common effect performed in the second jackpot game and the jackpot game, (c) These are figures showing the introduction effect of the common effect performed in the second big hit game and the small hit game. (A) is a figure showing an example of an AT long opening squealing effect, (b-1) is a figure showing an example of a challenge success production, (b-2) is a diagram showing an example of a challenge failure production, (c-1) Is a diagram showing an example of a continuation of FIG. 102 (b-1) in the challenge success production, (c-2) is a diagram showing an example of a continuation of FIG. 102 (b-2) in the challenge failure production, (d-1) The figure showing an example of a happy bonus effect, (d-2) is a figure showing the mode switched to the production mode D. It is a figure showing a mode that it rushed into specific chance production. It is a figure showing the mode of step 1 (SU1) of specific chance production. It is a figure showing a mode that the shift to step 2 (SU2) of specific chance production was successful. It is a figure showing a mode that transfer to step 2 (SU2) of specific chance production failed. It is a figure showing the mode of the specific chance state talk production of a specific chance production. It is a figure showing a mode that the transition (specific chance state) to step 3 (SU3) of specific chance production was successful. It is a figure showing a mode that the transition (specific chance state) to step 3 (SU3) of specific chance production failed. It is a figure showing the state of the roulette effect of a specific chance effect. It is a figure showing a mode that selection and fixed to the "Oninokoku" design and rushed into the development effect. It is a figure showing a mode that selection display of the "x" symbol is confirmed, and the stop display of the effect symbol which suggests a loss or the stop symbol display of the effect symbol which suggests a jackpot winning is performed. It is a figure showing the mode of presentation mode remaining number display, when the change display and stop display of a symbol are performed. It is a figure showing a count lock production | presentation aspect. It is a figure showing a mode that the count lock effect of a normal mode is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the count lock effect of the 1st special mode is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the count lock effect of the 2nd special mode is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the 1st rocking effect is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the 2nd lock rolling effect is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the rush production is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the 2nd special notice production is performed. It is a figure showing the mode of a series of flows in which the 2nd prefetch effect is performed. It is a figure showing the mode of a series of flows in which the 2nd prefetch effect is performed. It is a figure showing the mode of a series of flows in which the 2nd prefetch effect is performed. It is a figure showing the mode of a series of flows in which the 2nd prefetch effect is performed. It is a figure showing the mode of a series of flows in which the 2nd prefetch effect is performed. It is a figure showing the mode of a series of flows in which the 2nd prefetch effect is performed.

(Embodiment 1)
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine Y is formed with a gaming board mounting frame Y1, a glass door Y2 supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the gaming board mounting frame Y1, and a gaming area 2A in which gaming balls flow down. And a game board 2.

  The game board mounting frame Y1 is rotatably supported by an outer frame (not shown) fixed to the island facility of the game store, and is detachably mounted.

  The glass door Y2 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame Y1 via a hinge mechanism portion H at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is supported rotatably about the hinge mechanism portion H as a fulcrum. Therefore, by rotating the glass door Y2 like a door around the hinge mechanism H as a fulcrum, the game area 2A and the front portion of the game board mounting frame Y1 can be opened and closed. The glass door Y2 covers the game area 2A in a state where the game board 2 is closed so as to be visible.

  A lock mechanism R that fixes the glass door Y2 to the game board mounting frame Y1 is provided on the other end side of the glass door Y2. The fixing by the lock mechanism R can be released by a dedicated key.

  The glass door Y <b> 2 is provided with a receiving tray 50 that stores a plurality of game balls and a firing operation device 3 that can perform an operation for firing the game balls. The launch operation device 3 is connected to a game ball launch device (not shown) that can launch a game ball toward the game area 2A. The game ball launcher is provided on the front surface of the game board mounting frame Y1. The game balls stored in the tray 50 are supplied to the game ball launcher.

  The firing operation device 3 includes a base 31 fixed to the glass door Y2, and a launch handle 32 that is rotatably provided on the base 31. The game ball launcher launches a game ball with a strength (hereinafter referred to as “game ball launch strength”) according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 32.

  In the game area 2A of the game board 2, a frame-shaped decorative frame 29A, an inner rail member 29B having a curved shape, an outer rail member 29C, and a first grand prize winning port 8, which will be described later, are arranged. A guide member 29 </ b> D is provided on the top surface of which a guide path capable of guiding the sphere to the second starting port 7 is formed.

  The decorative frame 29 </ b> A is fitted into the approximate center of the game board 2. An image display device 14 including a liquid crystal display is fitted inside the decorative frame 29A. Further, an effect accessory device 17 is provided at the inner end of the decorative frame 29A.

  The inner rail member 29B is disposed outside the decorative frame 29A, and the outer rail member 29C is disposed outside the inner rail member 29B. A game ball fired with a predetermined game ball launch strength rises between the inner rail member 29B and the outer rail member 29C and enters the game area 2A. In the game area 2A, a plurality of nails and windmills are provided. A game ball that has entered the game area 2A can flow down in various directions by a plurality of nails and windmills.

  In the game area 2A, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning awards 11 are provided. Each general winning opening 11 is provided with a general winning opening detecting sensor 11a, and when the general winning opening detecting sensor 11a detects a gaming ball, a predetermined number (for example, ten) of gaming balls are paid out as winning balls. It is.

  In addition, a winning gate 10 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the lower right side of the decorative frame 29A in the game area 2A. The winning gate 10 is provided with a winning gate detection sensor 10a for detecting a game ball. A normal symbol lottery is performed on condition that the winning gate detection sensor 10a detects a game ball. The normal symbol lottery will be described later.

  In the game area 2 </ b> A, a first start port 6 that is invariable and can always enter a ball is provided below the image display device 14. The first start port 6 is provided with a first start port detection sensor 6a for detecting a game ball. The first special symbol lottery is performed on condition that the first start port detection sensor 6 detects a game ball. The first special symbol lottery will be described later. When the first start port detection sensor 6a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A variable second start port 7 is provided directly below the first start port 6 in the game area 2A. The second start port 7 is controlled by the second start port control device 70 to either a basic mode (closed mode) incapable of winning a prize or a special mode (open mode) of winning. The second start port 7 is also provided with a second start port detection sensor 7a for detecting a game ball. A second special symbol lottery is performed on condition that the second start port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball. The second special symbol lottery will be described later. When the second start port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball.

  The second start port control device 70 includes a rotatable normal movable piece 70A and a second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B as a drive unit for rotating the normal movable piece 70A.

  The normal movable piece 70A is composed of a rectangular door member. Normally, the movable piece 70A stops in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A (except when a predetermined condition is satisfied), and the second start port 7 is opened. It is closed. The closing of the second starting port 7 by the ordinary movable piece 70 </ b> A constitutes a basic mode of the second starting port 7.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the normal movable piece 70A is rotated forward about the rotation shaft formed at the lower end portion to open the second start port 7. The second start port 7 is controlled to a special mode that allows the ball to enter. The opening of the second starting port 7 by the ordinary movable piece 70 </ b> A constitutes a special mode of the second starting port 7. When the second starting port 7 is opened, the normal movable piece 70A protrudes from the game area 2A, and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the second starting port 7.

  Note that the predetermined condition for the second start-up port control device 70 is that the normal symbol lottery described above is determined as the winning normal symbol.

  A variable first big prize opening 8 is provided on the downstream side of the winning gate 10. The first big prize opening 8 is controlled by the first big prize opening control device 80 to either a basic mode in which a prize cannot be won or a special mode in which a prize can be won. The first big prize opening control device 80 includes a rotatable first special movable piece 80A and a first big prize opening opening / closing solenoid 80B as a drive unit for turning the first special movable piece 80A.

  The first special movable piece 80A is composed of a rectangular door member, and normally stops (with the exception of a predetermined condition) and stops with the surface being flush with the game area 2A. The mouth 8 is closed. The closing of the first big prize opening 8 by the first special movable piece 80A constitutes the basic mode of the first big prize opening 8.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first special movable piece 80A is rotated forward about the rotation shaft formed at the lower end portion to open the first big prize opening 8. The first big winning opening 8 is controlled to a special mode in which a ball can be entered. The opening of the first big prize opening 8 by the first special movable piece 80A constitutes a special mode of the first big prize opening 8. When the first special winning piece 80A is opened, the first special winning piece 80A protrudes from the game area 2A and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the first special winning opening 8. .

  The predetermined condition for the first grand prize winning control device 80 is the above-mentioned first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery (hereinafter, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are collectively referred to as “special”. In general, it is determined to be a big hit special symbol or a small bonus special symbol.

  A variable second big prize opening 9 is provided below the first big prize opening 8. The second big prize opening 9 is controlled by the second big prize opening control device 90 to either a basic mode in which a prize cannot be won or a special mode in which a prize can be won. The second big prize opening control device 90 includes a second special movable piece 90A composed of a rectangular door member having a rotation shaft at the lower side, and the second special movable piece 90A satisfies a predetermined condition. It works only when you do. That is, the second special movable piece 90 </ b> A is normally stopped (except when a predetermined condition is satisfied) so that the surface is flush with the game area 2 </ b> A, and the second big prize opening 9 is blocked. The second big prize opening 9 is blocked by the second special movable piece 90A in a stopped state (not activated), so that the second big prize opening 9 is controlled to a basic mode in which no prize can be won.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second special movable piece 90A is rotated forward about the rotation axis and the second big prize opening 9 is opened, so that the second big prize opening 9 can be won. Controlled to a special aspect. At this time, the second grand prize opening 9 is opened and the second special movable piece 90A protrudes from the game area 2A, so that the game balls flowing down are received and guided to the second big prize opening 9. Is possible.

  Note that the predetermined condition for the second big prize opening control device 90 is that the special symbol lottery is determined to be a special jackpot symbol.

  A specific area 12 through which a game ball can pass is provided inside the second big prize opening 9 (see FIG. 2). A game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening 9 always passes through the specific area 12. The specific area 12 is provided with a specific area detection sensor 12a capable of detecting a game ball.

  The game balls that have entered the first grand prize winning port 8 or the second grand prize winning port 9 are guided to a common discharge route. The discharge path is provided with a large winning opening detection sensor 8 a for detecting a game ball that has entered the first large winning opening 8 or the second large winning opening 9. When the big prize opening detection sensor 8a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball.

  The first starting port 6 can receive a game ball that has passed through the game area 2A on the left side of the decorative frame 29A, but a game ball that has passed through the game area 2A on the right side of the decorative frame 29A can enter. I can't do it. On the other hand, the second starting port 7 can receive a game ball that has passed through the left game area 2A or the right game area 2A of the decorative frame 29A. The winning gate 10, the first grand prize opening 8, and the second big prize opening 9 can enter a game ball that has passed through the game area 2A on the right side of the decorative frame 29A. A game ball that has passed through the game area 2A cannot enter. That is, the first starting port 6 and the winning gate 10, the first grand winning port 8, and the second large winning port 9 can play game balls separately.

  In addition, a game that could not enter any of the first starting port 6, the second starting port 7, the first major winning port 8, and the general winning port 11 at the lowermost end of the game area 2A. An out port 13 through which a ball enters is provided.

  The first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21 and the normal symbol are on the surface of the game board 2 and outside the game area 2A, that is, in a predetermined area where the game balls on the surface of the game board 2 do not flow down. A symbol display device comprising a display device 22, a first special symbol hold display device 23, a second special symbol hold display device 24, a hold display device comprising a normal symbol hold display device 25, and a right-handed display device 26 are provided. Yes.

  The first special symbol display device 20 is a variable display device that displays the result of the first special symbol lottery performed on condition that a game ball enters the first start port 6, and the second special symbol display device 21 is This is a variable display device that displays the result of the second special symbol lottery performed on condition that a game ball enters the second starting port 7.

  In the first special symbol lottery, a big hit determination random number value is acquired when a game ball enters the first start port 6, and the acquired big hit determination random number value is a random value corresponding to “big hit” Determining whether or not. In the second special symbol lottery, whether a big hit determination random number value is acquired when a game ball enters the second starting port 7, and the acquired big hit determination random number value is a random value corresponding to “big hit” Determining whether or not.

  When the first special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol display device 20 displays a variation of the special symbol based on the lottery result, and displays the first special symbol lottery representing the result of the first special symbol lottery. Stop display is performed. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20 is a notification of the lottery result. The same applies to the second special symbol lottery and the second special symbol display device 21.

  For example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 each include a plurality of LEDs. In the variation display of each special symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the corresponding first special symbol display device 20 or second special symbol display device 21 blinks at a predetermined interval. In the special symbol stop display, a specific LED indicating the result of each special symbol lottery is lit.

  The normal symbol display device 22 is a variable display device that displays the result of the normal symbol lottery performed on condition that the game ball passes the winning gate 10. The normal symbol lottery is a process of acquiring a random number value for winning determination when the game ball passes the winning gate 10 and determining whether or not the acquired random number value for winning determination is a random value corresponding to “win”. I mean.

  When the normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal symbol display device 22 displays the variation of the normal symbol based on the lottery result, and the stop display of the normal symbol representing the result of the normal symbol lottery is performed. That is, the normal symbol stop display on the normal symbol display device 22 is a notification of the lottery result.

  For example, each of the normal symbol display devices 22 includes a plurality of LEDs. In the normal symbol variation display, for example, a predetermined LED of the normal symbol display device 22 blinks at a predetermined interval. And in the stop display of a normal symbol, specific LED showing the result of a normal symbol lottery lights.

  By the way, even if a game ball enters the start opening 6 or 7 during the special game during the special symbol display or during the special game in which the first big prize opening control device 80 or the second big prize opening control device 90 is operated, The special symbol variation display is not performed and the result of the special symbol lottery is not notified. That is, the special symbol variation display may be suspended under certain conditions. In the present embodiment, as a fixed condition, an upper limit is provided for the number of special symbols that can be suspended. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value is set to “4” for each of the start ports 6 and 7. That is, the right to execute the special symbol variation display on the first starting port 6 (hereinafter referred to as “first special symbol hold”) and the right to execute the special symbol variation display on the second starting port 7. (Hereinafter referred to as “second special figure hold”) can be held up to four (hereinafter, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are collectively referred to as “special figure hold”). ).

  The first special symbol hold display device 23 displays the hold number (U1: hereinafter referred to as “first special figure hold number”) of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “first special figure change display”). To do. The second special symbol hold display device 24 displays the hold number (U2: hereinafter referred to as “second special figure hold number”) of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “second special figure change display”). To do. The first special symbol hold display device 23 and the second special symbol hold display device 24 include, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and turn on a predetermined LED according to the number of holds.

  Similarly, for the variable symbol display (hereinafter referred to as “general variable display”), the upper limit reserved number is set to four, and the reserved number (G: hereinafter referred to as “general map reserved number”). ) Is displayed on the normal symbol hold display device 25. The normal symbol hold display device 25 includes, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and lights a predetermined LED according to the number of hold of the normal symbols.

  The right-handed display device 26 is a display device that lights up in a short-time gaming state, which will be described later, and the right-handed display device 26 lights up by passing the game ball through the game area 2A on the right side of the decorative frame 29A. This indicates a notification of entering the ball. The right-handed display device 26 is composed of, for example, one LED.

  In addition, the gaming machine Y is provided with an effect device for executing various effects. In the present embodiment, the effect device includes an image display device 14, an audio output device 15, an effect lighting device 16, and an effect accessory device 17. An image display device 14 and an effect accessory device 17 are provided on the game board 2, and an audio output device 15 and an effect lighting device 16 are provided on the glass door Y2.

  The image display device 14 performs various effects by displaying various still images and moving images. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display is used as the image display device 14, but other types of display devices such as a plasma display and an organic EL display can also be used.

  The effect accessory device 17 includes a movable portion 17A and a movable portion 17B, and performs an effect by an operation by operating the movable portion 17A or the movable portion 17B. The audio output device 15 produces a sound effect by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like. The effect lighting device 16 performs an effect by illumination by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp.

  The saucer 50 is provided with an effect button device 18 and a selection button device 19 that function as input devices for performing operations related to setting and canceling various effects and privilege grant modes described later.

  The effect button device 18 includes an effect button 18A that can be operated and an effect button detection switch 18a that is connected to the effect button 18A and detects an operation on the effect button 18A (see FIG. 3).

  The selection button device 19 is connected to an operable selection button 19A and a selection button 19A, and includes a selection button detection switch 19a that detects an operation on the selection button 19A (see FIG. 3).

  The selection button 19A includes an upper button 191A, a left button 192A, a lower button 193A, and a right button 194A. Each button 191 </ b> A to 194 </ b> A is provided so as to be pressed in a state of protruding from the tray 50.

  The effect device performs various effects according to the progress (state) of the game. As an effect, for example, there is a special drawing lottery effect that is performed in response to the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. The special drawing lottery effect is performed in the image display device 14. In the special drawing lottery effect, a change display of the effect symbol and a stop display of the effect symbol are performed.

  The variation display of the effect symbol is performed corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect symbol varies for a predetermined time in a predetermined manner. The stop display of the effect symbol is performed corresponding to the stop display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “effect symbol display” when the change display and stop display of the effect symbol are collectively referred to). In the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect symbol is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined manner representing the result of the special symbol lottery.

  The effect symbols are, for example, three rows of special decorative symbols (for example, decorations representing numbers from “1” to “9”) arranged in the left region, the central region, and the right region of the display region 140 such as the image display device 14. Pattern). In the variation display of the effect symbols, the special decorative symbols in each row move (variable display) from top to bottom as if the reels are rotating. Note that the variation display mode of the effect symbol is not limited to this. In addition, during the variation display of the effect symbols, various effect images such as background images and object images such as characters, movies, and the like are displayed according to the result of the special symbol lottery.

  On the other hand, in the stop display of the effect symbols, the above three rows of special decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left region, the center region, and the right region of the display region 140 of the image display device 14 or the like. The arrangement of special decorative symbols on a predetermined effective line (for example, the central horizontal line in the display area 140) when the effect symbols are stopped and displayed represents the result of the special symbol lottery.

  In addition to the special drawing lottery effect, a roulette effect that is triggered by a normal symbol lottery described later, a special game effect that is performed when a jackpot game is executed, and a special symbol variation display or special game is performed for a predetermined period. Various effects such as a demonstration effect performed in an internal standby state (so-called customer waiting state) are performed.

  Control means 100 for controlling the progress of the game is provided on the back surface of the game board 2 and the glass door Y2. The control means includes a main control board 101, an effect control board 102, a payout control board 103, a lamp control board 104, an image control board 105, a power supply board 107, a game information output terminal board 108, and the like.

  Next, the control means 100 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The power supply board 107 supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine Y. On the power supply board 107, a backup power supply (not shown) made of a capacitor and a power supply monitoring circuit 107a are mounted. The backup power source is not limited to a capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery or a combination of a capacitor and a battery.

  The power supply monitoring circuit 107a monitors the power supply voltage (supply power) supplied to the gaming machine Y, detects when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined level value lower than the normal value, and outputs a voltage drop signal as a main signal. Output to the control board 101. Specifically, the power supply monitoring circuit 107a detects a voltage drop of 30V by monitoring DC30V obtained by rectifying AC24V supplied to the power supply, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined level value (for example, + 22V), As a voltage drop is detected, a voltage drop signal is output to the main control board 101. The power supply voltage to be monitored is higher than the power supply voltage (for example, +5 V) of the circuit element mounted on each board. For example, a voltage (+30 V) immediately after being converted from AC to DC is used.

  Furthermore, if the monitoring voltage (+30 V) is higher than the voltage (for example, +12 V) supplied to the various switches of the gaming machine Y, it is possible to prevent erroneous switch-on detection at the time of power interruption. That is, when the voltage of the + 30V power supply is monitored, the decrease can be detected at a stage before + 12V produced after the creation of + 30V starts to drop. In other words, when the voltage of the + 12V power supply decreases, the switch output becomes an on state. However, by monitoring the + 30V power supply voltage that decreases faster than + 12V and recognizing a power interruption, the switch output exhibits an on state. Before entering the power recovery waiting state, the switch output is not detected.

  The main control board 101 controls the basic operation of the game. The main control board 101 includes a main CPU 101a, a main ROM 101b, and a main RAM 101c. The main CPU 101a reads out a program stored in the main ROM 101b based on input signals from various detection sensors, timers (quartz crystal units) and the like, performs arithmetic processing related to the game, and directly controls various control devices and display devices. Then, a predetermined command or the like based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the effect control board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like.

  The main RAM 101c functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the main CPU 101a. The main RAM 101 c is a backup RAM as a nonvolatile storage means that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 107. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine Y is stopped (disconnected), a part or all of the main RAM 101c is kept for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The contents are saved. That is, based on detecting that the power supplied to the gaming machine Y has reached a predetermined level value lower than the normal value, the main CPU 101a has at least gaming state information including a gaming state when the predetermined level value is detected. And information related to the out ball (hereinafter referred to as “out information”) is stored in the main RAM 101c so as to be able to be held even in a state where the power supplied to the gaming machine Y is not supplied.

  In particular, at least various data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the main CPU 101a (big hit game flag, round number (R), high probability state designation flag, high probability flag (probability variation flag), special symbol determination result (big hit) Or lost, jackpot type), hour / hour flag, hour / hour remaining number of times (hour / hour counter), special figure special electricity processing data, ordinary figure electric power treatment data, etc.), obi, and unpaid prize balls indicate the progress of the game. Data, which is stored in the backup RAM (backup data).

  The data corresponding to the control state of the main CPU 101a is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of the power interruption based on the data when the power is restored after the power interruption. In the present embodiment, the entire main RAM 101c is backed up.

  Further, as described above, an interruption signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board 107 has decreased to a predetermined level or less is input to an input port (not shown) of the main control board 101. That is, the power supply monitoring circuit 107a mounted on the power supply board 107 monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC30V, DC5V, etc.) used in the gaming machine Y, and the voltage value is set at a predetermined level. When the value drops to the value (when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected), an interruption signal indicating that is output to the main control board 101.

  On the input side of the main control board 101, via an input port (not shown), a first starting port detection sensor 6a, a second starting port detection sensor 7a, a big winning port detection sensor 8a, a winning gate detection sensor 10a, A general winning opening detection sensor 11a and a specific area detection sensor 12a are connected. When each detection sensor detects a game ball, various detection signals (a first start port detection signal, a second start port detection signal, a big winning port detection signal, a winning gate detection signal, a general winning port detection signal, a specific region detection signal) ) Is output to the main control board 101.

  On the output side of the main control board 101, a second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B for operating the normal movable piece 70A of the second start port control device 70 and a first big prize opening control are provided via an output port (not shown). A first big prize opening opening / closing solenoid 80B for operating the first special movable piece 80A of the device 80 and a second big prize opening opening / closing solenoid 90B for operating the second special movable piece 90A of the second big prize opening control device 90 are provided. It is connected. The main control board 101 outputs a control signal for controlling each solenoid to the second start opening / closing solenoid 70B, the first large winning opening / closing solenoid 80B, and the second large winning opening / closing solenoid 90B.

  Further, on the output side of the main control board 101, a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, and a first special symbol hold are provided via an output port (not shown). A display device 23, a second special symbol hold display device 24, a normal symbol hold display device 25, and a right-handed display device 26 are connected. The main control board 101 outputs display control signals for controlling the display devices to the display devices 20 to 26.

  Furthermore, a game information output terminal board 108 is connected to the output side of the main control board 101 via an output port (not shown). The main control board 101 outputs predetermined information (game information) relating to the game and predetermined information (out information) relating to the out ball to the game information output terminal board 108 as external signals.

  A game information display device is connected to the game information output terminal board 108. The game information output terminal board 108 outputs an external signal to the game information display device and the hall computer. The game information display device is provided on the gaming machine Y, and displays predetermined game information and the like based on the predetermined game information (external signal). Therefore, the store clerk and player of a game store can confirm game information. In addition, the hall computer can input game information and output the game information, so that the game information can be used for management of a game store.

  The effect control board 102 includes a sub CPU 102a, a sub ROM 102b, and a sub RAM 102c. The effect control board 102 is connected to the main control board 101 so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 101 to the effect control board 102. The main control board 101 transmits a predetermined command to the effect control board 102 based on the processing related to the game, and the effect control board 102 receives the predetermined command.

  An effect button detection switch 18 a and a selection button detection switch 19 a are connected to the input side of the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104.

  When the effect button 18A is operated, the effect button detection switch 18a outputs an effect button detection signal indicating that the operation of the effect button 18A has been performed to the lamp control board 104 to the effect control board 102. When the effect button detection signal is input, the lamp control board 104 outputs the effect control board 102 to the effect control board 102.

  When the selection button 19A is operated, the selection button detection switch 19a outputs a selection button detection signal indicating that the selection button 19A has been operated to the lamp control board 104 to the effect control board 102. When the selection button detection signal is input, the lamp control board 104 outputs it to the effect control board 102.

  The selection button detection switch 19a is connected to the upper button 191A to detect the operation of the upper button 191A, and the left button detection switch 192a is connected to the left button 192A to detect the operation of the left button 192A. The lower button 193A is connected to the lower button 193A to detect the operation of the lower button 193A, and the right button detection switch 194a is connected to the right button 194A to detect the operation of the right button 194A.

  When each button detection switch 191a, 192a, 193a, 194a detects an operation, the upper button detection signal, the left button detection signal, the lower button detection signal, and the right button detection signal are respectively transmitted via the lamp control board 104. To the effect control board 102. The upper button detection signal, the left button detection signal, the lower button detection signal, and the right button detection signal are collectively referred to as a “selection button detection signal”.

  The sub CPU 102a outputs a command output from the main control board 101, an effect button detection signal output from the effect button device 18, a selection button detection signal output from the selection button device 19, and an input signal from a timer (crystal oscillator). Based on the out sphere detection signal output from the out sphere detection sensor 52 and the like, the program stored in the sub ROM 102b is read out to perform arithmetic processing, and based on the processing, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 are processed. A command for controlling the production is transmitted to The sub RAM 102c functions as a data work area when the sub CPU 102a performs arithmetic processing.

  The payout control board 103 performs launch control for launching the game ball and payout control for paying out the game ball to the player. The payout control board 103 includes a payout CPU 103a, a payout ROM 103b, and a payout RAM 103c. The payout control board 103 is connected to the main control board 101 and the power supply board 107 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication, and is connected to the effect control board 102 in one direction so as to be able to transmit.

  A touch sensor 32a and a firing volume knob 32b are connected to the input side of the payout CPU 103a. The touch sensor 32 a is mounted in the firing handle 32. When a player, a store clerk, or the like touches the launch handle 32, the touch sensor 32 a detects that a person has touched the launch handle 32 and transmits a launch handle detection signal to the launch control board 106. The firing volume knob 32 b is connected to the firing handle 32. The firing volume knob 32b rotates in conjunction with the firing handle 32 and detects the rotation angle.

  The payout control board 103 is connected to the firing solenoid 41 via the power supply board 107 on the output side. The payout control board 103 permits energization of the firing solenoid 41 when receiving the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a.

  When the firing handle 32 is operated to change the rotation angle of the firing handle 32, the gear connected to the firing handle 32 rotates and the knob 32b of the firing volume connected to the gear rotates. A voltage corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 32 detected by the firing volume knob 32 b is applied to the firing solenoid 41.

  When a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 41, the firing solenoid 41 operates according to the applied voltage. In this manner, the payout control board 103 controls the energization of the launch solenoid 41 based on the information contained in the launch handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a and the input signal from the launch volume knob 32b, and launches the game ball.

  In the present embodiment, the reciprocating speed of the firing solenoid 41 is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control board 106. Since one game ball is fired every time the firing solenoid 41 makes one reciprocation, the number of game balls fired in one minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute).

  Further, a payout drive unit 51 of the payout device 5 for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from a storage tank (not shown) to the player is connected to the output side of the payout control board 103. The payout CPU 103a reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM 103b based on the prize ball request signal transmitted from the main control board 101, performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout device 5 to give a predetermined game ball to the player. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 103c functions as a data work area during the calculation process of the payout CPU 103a.

  The lamp control board 104 includes a lamp CPU 104a, a lamp ROM 104b, and a lamp RAM 104c, similarly to the above boards. On the output side of the lamp control board 104, an effect lighting device 16 and an effect accessory device 17 are connected.

  The lamp CPU 104a performs light emission control of the effect lighting device 16 and irradiation of light from the effect lighting device 16 based on a command related to effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102 (hereinafter referred to as “effect control command”). Drive control for the motor for changing the direction is performed. Further, the lamp CPU 104a performs drive control on a solenoid or a motor that operates the effect accessory device 17 based on the effect control command.

  Further, on the input side of the lamp control board 104, an effect button detection switch 18 a of the effect button device 18 and a selection button detection switch 19 a of the selection button device 19 are connected. When the effect button detection signal or the selection button detection signal is input, the lamp control board 104 outputs each to the effect control board 102. That is, the lamp control board 104 relays the effect button detection signal and the selection button detection signal between the effect control board 102, the effect button device 18, and the selection button device 19.

  The image control board 105 generates at least a video signal related to an image such as a moving image or a still image to be displayed on the image display device 14, and outputs the image signal to the image display device 14 and sound output to the sound output device 15. A sound generation unit 105C that generates and outputs the sound signal to the sound output device 15, and a control unit 105A that controls and controls the image generation unit 105B and the sound generation unit 105C.

  The overall control unit 105 </ b> A of the image control board 105 includes an overall CPU 105 </ b> Aa, an overall ROM 105 </ b> Ab, and an overall RAM 105 </ b> Ac for performing image display control by the image display device 14.

  The overall CPU 105Aa is connected to an overall ROM 105Ab in which a control program and the like are stored, and a control program necessary for the operation of the overall CPU 105Aa is read out. Upon receiving a command related to effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102, the general CPU 105Aa issues an instruction for an image to be displayed on the image display device 14 on the image generation unit 105B based on the command, and also transmits to the sound generation unit 105C. A voice instruction to be output from the voice output device 15 is issued.

  The general RAM 105Ac functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the general CPU 105Aa, and temporarily stores data read from the general ROM 105Ab.

  The general ROM 105Ab is composed of a mask ROM, a control processing program for the general ROM 105Ab, a display list generation program for generating a display list, an animation pattern for displaying a production pattern animation, animation scene information, and the like. Is remembered.

  This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes the specific content of the effect by the image, and the animation pattern is associated with the animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method. Various information such as a duty ratio that is a parameter of the luminance of the image display device 14 is included.

  The image generation unit 105B includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 105Ba that is an image processor, a CGROM 105Bb that stores image data, and a VRAM 105Bc that temporarily stores drawing data generated from the image data. I have.

  The VDP 105Ba is connected to the CGROM 105Bb in which image data is stored, and generates drawing data as a source of a video signal (RGB signal or the like) based on the image data based on an instruction from the overall CPU 105Aa. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the image display device 14, for example, a material image representing an individual image such as a background image such as a scene, a character, and a dialogue that constitutes a background of a decorative design image or a decorative design. It is data. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

  The CGROM 105Bb includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like, and compresses and stores image data (sprites, movies), etc., consisting of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image.

  Further, the CGROM 105Bb stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without being compressed. The CGROM 105Bb may have a configuration in which only a part of the image data is compressed without being compressed. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  The image generation unit 105B has a crystal oscillator. The crystal oscillator outputs a pulse signal to the VDP 105Ba. The VDP 105Ba divides the pulse signal to generate a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the image display device 14, and outputs the synchronization signal to the image display device 14.

  Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 101b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 5A-1 and FIG. 5A-2 are diagrams illustrating an example of the jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination constitutes a special symbol lottery and is to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 5A-1 is a table (hereinafter referred to as “first jackpot determination table”) that is referred to in the jackpot determination performed when the game ball enters the first start port 6 as a trigger. On the other hand, FIG. 5A-2 is a table (hereinafter referred to as “second jackpot determination table”) that is referred to in the jackpot determination performed when the game ball enters the second starting port 7 as a trigger.

  In any jackpot determination table, a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as “low probability jackpot determination table”) referred to when the jackpot winning probability described later is relatively low (set to a standard value). And a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as “high probability jackpot determination table”) that is referred to when the state is relatively high (set higher than the standard value).

  In each jackpot determination table, a jackpot determination value and a determination result are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, by matching the jackpot determination random number acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 with the jackpot determination table, Either “winning” or “losing” is determined.

  If the result of the jackpot determination is “big jackpot”, after the special symbol indicating the result is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game with the opening of the first jackpot 8 or the second jackpot 9 is executed. If the result of the jackpot determination is “small jackpot”, after the special symbol indicating the result is stopped and displayed, the bonus game with the opening of the first big winning opening 8 is executed. If the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, neither the jackpot game or the jackpot game is executed.

  When the result of the big hit determination is “losing”, the reach determination is further performed based on the reach determination tables of FIG. 5 (b-1) and FIG. 5 (b-2). In the reach determination table, the reach determination value and whether or not the reach effect is executed (whether or not the reach effect is executed) are uniquely associated and stored. As described later, whether or not the reach effect is executed by collating the reach determination random number obtained when the game ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 with the reach determination table Is determined.

FIG. 5B-2 shows that the reach determination is made after the end of the high probability game state among the reach determination random numbers acquired when the game ball enters the second start port 7 during the high probability game state. In the reach determination random number, the second reach determination table referred to in the reach determination. On the other hand, FIG. 5B-1 is a first reach determination table that is referred to in a period other than the period in which the second reach determination table is referred to. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
In addition, the second reach determination table is more likely to execute the reach effect than the first reach determination table.

  If the result of the reach determination is “execute reach effect (with reach effect)”, reach effect is performed in order to increase the player's expectation of winning the big hit in the special drawing lottery effect.

  As the reach effect, for example, the above-mentioned decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in two areas of the left area, the center area, and the right area of the display area 140 of the image display device 14 during the variable display of the effect symbols. A part of the symbol performs a pseudo stop display), and when a predetermined decorative symbol stops on a predetermined effective line in the remaining one region, a state of a decorative symbol representing a winning jackpot is obtained (so-called “tempe”) ) Will occur. If the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the result of the jackpot determination is still “losing” even if this stunning specific state is called “temper”.

  After a temper is generated in the reach production, there is a case where the jackpot winning suggestion effect that raises the expectation of the jackpot winning is developed or not. Further, in the reach production, the reach state does not always occur. In other words, there is also a reach effect in which a predetermined effect that increases the player's expectation of winning the big hit is performed without generating a temper. If the result of the jackpot determination is “big jackpot”, the reach effect is basically performed in most cases.

  FIG. 6A to FIG. 6D are diagrams illustrating an example of the special symbol determination table. The special symbol determination constitutes a special symbol lottery, and determines the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 (special symbol stop display mode) based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is.

  The special symbol determination table is largely divided according to the result of the jackpot determination (big hit, small hit and loss). That is, FIG. 6A is a table referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the jackpot determination is “big hit”, and FIG. 6B is the case where the result of the jackpot determination is “small hit”. The tables referred to in the special symbol determination, FIGS. 6C and 6D, are tables referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

  Each of these tables is further divided according to the type of start port (first start port 6 or second start port 7) where a game ball was entered as a trigger for the special symbol determination. When the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the special symbol determination table is further divided according to whether or not the reach effect is executed (reach determination result).

  In each special symbol determination table, the special symbol determination value and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the special symbol determination random number acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 is collated with the special symbol determination table to be stopped and displayed. A special symbol is determined. As special symbol identification information to be stopped and displayed, special symbol stop data and effect symbol designation command are set.

  The special figure stop data is used in the process in the main control board 101, and the effect design designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the process in the effect control board 102. The effect symbol designation command is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the time of starting the variation display of the special symbol (at the time of the special symbol memory determination process in step S300).

  The effect designating command is a 1-byte MODE data for identifying a special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 20 or second special symbol display device 21) on which special symbols related to the special symbol determination are stopped. And 1-byte DATA data for identifying a special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

  As for the design symbol designation command, if the MODE data is “E1H”, it means that the special symbol display device 20 stops displaying the special symbol, and if the MODE data is “E2H”, the second special symbol is displayed. This means that special symbol stop display is performed on the symbol display device 21. The effect designating command with MODE data “E1H” is referred to as a “first effect designating command”, and the effect designating command with MODE data “E2H” is referred to as a “second effect designating command”.

  FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating an example of a jackpot game control table used when a jackpot game is controlled.

  The jackpot game control table stores conditions for controlling the jackpot game. As a condition for controlling the jackpot game, the opening time, which is the period from the start of the jackpot game until the first opening of the first jackpot 8 or the second jackpot 9, and the opening start Opening designation command that is sometimes transmitted to the production control board 102, the type of table used to control the opening / closing of the first grand prize port 8 or the second grand prize port 9, the first grand prize port 8 or the second grand prize port 9 The ending time, which is the period from the end of the last release to the end of the jackpot game, and the ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 when the ending starts are set. The conditions for controlling these jackpot games are related to the jackpot type, that is, the special symbol type (special figure stop data). That is, which control condition is used in the jackpot game is selected based on the type of special symbol.

  8 (a) to 8 (b) and FIGS. 9 (a) to 9 (b) are for the jackpot game used when controlling the opening / closing of the first big winning opening 8 and the second big winning opening 9. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a big prize opening / closing control table. FIG. 8A constitutes a jackpot game, a table referred to in the first jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot 1 and the jackpot 5 (see FIG. 6A), FIG. 8B constitutes the jackpot game, Table referred to in the second jackpot game corresponding to jackpot 2 (see FIG. 6 (a)), FIG. 9 (a) constitutes the jackpot game, and corresponds to the jackpot 3 (see FIG. 6 (a)). A table referred to in the jackpot game, FIG. 9B is a table constituting the jackpot game and referred to in the fourth jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot 4 (see FIG. 6A).

  The big winning opening / closing control table for the big hit game stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the first big winning opening 8 and the second big winning opening 9 during the big win game. As conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the first grand prize winning port 8 and the second grand prize winning port 9, the round number (R) which is the number of the round game, the first grand prize winning port 8 and the second grand prize winning in each round game Opening of the mouth 9 (operation of the first grand prize port control device 80 and operation of the second grand prize port control device 90), the special electric operation number (K), and the first grand prize port 8 and the second grand prize The opening time and closing time (operation time / non-operation time) of the mouth 9 are set.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of the small hit game control table used when controlling the small hit game.

  The small hit game control table stores conditions for controlling the small hit game. As conditions for controlling the small hit game, the opening time, which is the period from the start of the small hit game to the first opening of the first big winning opening 8, and the stage control board 102 at the start of the opening. Opening designation command, type of table used to control the opening / closing of the first big prize opening 8, and the period from the last opening of the first big prize opening 8 to the end of the small hit game And the ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of ending. The conditions for controlling these small hit games are related to the type of small hit, that is, the type of special symbol (special drawing stop data). That is, which control condition is used in the small hit game is selected based on the type of special symbol.

  FIG. 9C is a diagram illustrating an example of a small winning game opening / closing control table used for controlling the opening / closing of the first winning opening 8. The big winning opening / closing control table for the small hit game stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the first big winning opening 8 during the small hit game. As conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the first prize winning opening 8, a special electric operation number (K) which is an opening number of the first prize winning opening 8 (operation of the first prize winning control device 80), and the first The opening time / closing time (operating time / non-operating time) of the big prize opening 8 is set.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a post-special game determination table that is referred to when determining a game state and a specific period after a special game. The post-special game determination table is divided according to the jackpot winning probability (low probability game state / high probability game state). In each of the divided tables, the special symbol type (special diagram stop data) and the specific area passing flag The combination of ON / OFF and the game state and the specific period set when the special game ends are stored in a uniquely associated manner.

  If the high probability flag in the post-special game determination table is ON, the winning probability of jackpot after the special game is set to high probability (high probability gaming state), and if the high probability flag is OFF, the jackpot after the special game Is set to a low probability (low probability gaming state). On the other hand, if the hourly flag in the post-special game determination table is ON, the start port winning ease is set to the hourly gaming state after the special game, and if the hourly flag is OFF, the starting port winning ease after the special game is set. Is set to the non-time saving gaming state.

  The specific period is a special period that is set for a predetermined period after the special game in response to the big win and the small win. Whether or not the specific period can be set and its type are also stored in a manner uniquely associated with the combination of the special symbol type (special symbol stop data) and the ON / OFF state of the specific area passing flag.

  Furthermore, in the post-special game determination table, the high probability game state set after the special game, the short-time game state, and the number of special symbol variable display that can be executed according to a specific period (Xa, Ja, Ta: hereinafter “executable” The “number of times” is also stored uniquely associated with the combination of the special symbol type (special symbol stop data) and the ON / OFF of the specific area passage flag. The number of times that the special symbol display can be executed means the specified number of times that the special symbol is changed and displayed according to the newly set gaming state and the specific period.

(Special symbol variation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 11 to FIG. 13 are diagrams showing an example of a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred to when determining a variation display mode of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as “special figure fluctuation pattern”). The special symbol variation pattern is associated with the time required for the special symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol variation time”) and the content of the variation representation, which is an effect performed while the special symbol variation display is being performed. It has been. The special symbol variation pattern includes a first special symbol variation pattern which is a variation display mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 and a first special symbol variation pattern which is displayed on the second special symbol display device 21. It is distinguished from the second special figure variation pattern which is a mode of variation display of two special symbols.

  FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred to when determining a special figure fluctuation pattern in the normal gaming state (normal period), and FIG. 12 shows a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state which will be described later. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a special figure variation pattern in the first specific period and the second specific period which is a low-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state. A special reference referred to when determining the special figure variation pattern in the third specific period of the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state after the small hit game generated in the special symbol lottery in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state It is a figure which shows an example of a figure fluctuation pattern determination table. That is, the special figure variation pattern determination table is roughly divided according to the type of period.

  The special figure variation pattern judgment table further includes special figure stop data and special figures reflecting the result of the special symbol judgment and the type of the special symbol display device (starting port related to the special symbol display) that operates in the special symbol display. It is divided according to the number of reservations (U1 or U2).

  In each table, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value and one or a plurality of special figure fluctuation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, by comparing the special figure variation pattern determination random number acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 with the special diagram variation pattern determination table, A special figure variation pattern is determined.

  Since the special figure fluctuation pattern is allocated with a predetermined probability set in advance in each table, the special figure fluctuation pattern has a degree of expectation of jackpot expectation or a specific jackpot win (for example, jackpot 1, jackpot 2, etc.) Are associated with each other.

  The special figure variation pattern is determined by the first pre-determination process (step S236) or the second pre-determination process (step S246) when the game ball enters the start ports 6 and 7 (during the input control process of step S200). In addition, it is determined by the special symbol variation pattern determination (step S313-3) at the time of starting the variation display of the special symbol (during the special symbol memory determination processing in step S300).

  A start opening prize designation command and a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command are set corresponding to each special figure fluctuation pattern. The start opening winning designation command corresponds to the special figure variation pattern determined by the first pre-determination process or the second pre-determination process, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the first pre-determination process or the second pre-determination process. The special figure fluctuation pattern designation command corresponds to the special figure fluctuation pattern determined by the special figure fluctuation pattern determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the special figure fluctuation pattern determination.

  The special symbol variation pattern designation command is a 1-byte identifier for identifying a special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 20 or second special symbol display device 21) on which a special symbol variation display related to the special symbol determination is performed. It is composed of MODE data and 1-byte DATA data for identifying a special figure variation pattern. For the special figure variation pattern designation command, if the MODE data is “E6H”, this means that the special symbol variation display is performed on the first special symbol display device 20, and if the MODE data is “E7H”, 2 Indicates that special symbols are displayed on the special symbol display device 21 in a variable manner.

  Note that the special map fluctuation pattern designation command with MODE data “E6H” is “first special figure fluctuation pattern designation command”, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command with MODE data “E7H” is “second special figure”. This is called “variation pattern designation command”.

  The start opening winning designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the type of the start opening and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the special figure variation pattern. As for the start opening prize designation command, if the MODE data is “E3H”, it indicates that a game ball has entered the first start opening 6, and if the MODE data is “E4H”, the second start opening 7 is displayed. Indicates that a game ball has entered. It should be noted that the start opening prize designation command whose MODE data is “E3H” is “first start opening prize designation command”, and the start opening prize designation command whose MODE data is “E4H” is “second start opening prize designation command”. "

  FIG. 14A to FIG. 14F show an example of a table used when controlling a normal symbol-based game based on winning to the winning gate 10.

  FIG. 14A is a diagram illustrating an example of the hit determination table. The hit determination is to determine whether or not to execute an auxiliary game that involves opening the second start port 7. As described later, the winning determination is performed based on a winning determination random number acquired based on the passing of the game ball through the winning gate 10.

  The hit determination table is divided according to the start opening winning easiness. Specifically, the hit determination table is divided into a hit determination table referred to in the non-time-saving gaming state and a hit determination table referred to in the time-saving gaming state.

  In each hit determination table, a hit determination value and a determination result are uniquely associated and stored. By collating the acquired random number for hit determination with the hit determination table, either “winning” or “losing” is determined. When “winning” is won, an auxiliary game with the opening of the second start port 7 is executed.

  FIG. 14B is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination is to determine a normal symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. The normal symbol determination table is divided according to the result of winning determination (winning and losing).

  Each normal symbol determination table stores a normal symbol determination value and a normal symbol that is stopped and displayed in a uniquely associated manner. As will be described later, the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by comparing the normal symbol determination random number acquired when the game ball passes the winning gate 10 with the normal symbol determination table. As the normal symbol identification information to be stopped and displayed, the normal symbol stop symbol data and the normal effect symbol designation command are set.

  The normal stop symbol data is used in the processing in the main control board 101, and the normal effect symbol designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the processing in the effect control board 102.

  FIG. 14 (c) determines a variation pattern of a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as a “normal diagram variation pattern”) associated with a time required to display the variation of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as a “normal diagram variation time”). It is a figure which shows the common figure fluctuation pattern determination table for this. The normal variation pattern determination table is composed of a general variation variation determination table that is referred to in the non-short game state and a general variation pattern determination table that is referred to in the short time gaming state.

  In each table, a common pattern variation pattern determination value and one or a plurality of common map variation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the normal variation pattern is determined by collating the random number for determining the normal variation pattern acquired when the game ball passes the winning gate 10 with the normal variation pattern determination table.

  A command change pattern designation command is set corresponding to the command map change pattern. It is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the normal pattern variation pattern is determined. When the effect control board 102 receives the normal pattern variation pattern designation command, the normal symbol variation display is started from now on, and the determination result of the normal symbol determination related to the variation display of the normal symbol is recognized. it can.

  The usual pattern change pattern designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the gaming state related to the current start opening winning ease, and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the usual figure change pattern. Yes. With respect to the usual variation pattern designation command, if the MODE data is “D6H”, it represents a non-short-time gaming state, and if the MODE data is “D7H”, it represents a time-short gaming state.

  FIG. 14D shows an example of the auxiliary game reference data determination table. This table stores data (auxiliary game reference data) that is referred to when performing an auxiliary game. As shown in FIG. 14D, in the auxiliary game reference data determination table, the combination of the current start port winning easiness and the usual figure stop symbol data is associated with the auxiliary game reference data. That is, the auxiliary game reference data includes information regarding the start opening winning easiness state and the result of the normal symbol determination when the normal symbol determination is performed.

  FIG. 14E is a diagram illustrating an example of an auxiliary game control table used when controlling the auxiliary game.

  The auxiliary game control table stores conditions for controlling the auxiliary game. As conditions for controlling the auxiliary game, an opening time, which is a period from when the auxiliary game is started to when the second opening 7 is first opened, and transmission to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening. Opening designation command, type of table used to control opening / closing of the second starting port 7, ending time, which is a period from the end of the last opening of the second starting port 7 to the end of the auxiliary game, And the ending designation | designated command transmitted to the production | presentation control board 102 at the time of ending start is set. The conditions for controlling these auxiliary games are associated with auxiliary game reference data.

  FIG. 14 (f) is a diagram illustrating an example of a second start port opening / closing control table for auxiliary games used when controlling opening / closing of the second start port 7. Conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second start port 7 during the auxiliary game are stored in the second start port opening / closing control table for the auxiliary game. As conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 7, a general electric operation number (D) which is an opening number (operation of the second starting port control device 70) number of the second starting port 7 in the auxiliary game, 2 Opening time and closing time (operation time / non-operation time) of the start port 7 are set.

(Explanation of special game types)
A special game will be described. In the present embodiment, the special game involving the opening of the first grand prize port 8 or the second grand prize port 9 (operation of the first grand prize port control device 80 or the second grand prize port control device 90) is “ The game consists of a “big hit game” that is executed when the “big hit” is won, and a “small hit game” that is executed when the “small hit” is won. The jackpot game is mainly based on a difference in opening and closing modes of the first jackpot 8 or the second jackpot 9, and the first jackpot game, the second jackpot game, the third jackpot game, It is divided into “4 big hit games”.

  In the jackpot game, a round game involving one or more opening of the first big prize opening 8 or the second big prize opening 9 is executed a predetermined number of times. In each round game, the number of times that the first grand prize opening 8 or the second grand prize opening 9 can be opened (hereinafter referred to as the maximum number of times of opening) and the total time that can be opened (hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening time) are preliminarily determined. Is set. The reason why it can be opened is that the number of game balls that can enter the first grand prize opening 8 or the second big prize opening 9 during one round game is limited (for example, 9). Therefore, even if the first grand prize opening 8 or the second grand prize opening 9 is not opened at the maximum number of times, the first grand prize opening 8 or the second grand prize opening 9 is closed, and the round game may end. is there. Even if the maximum opening time has not elapsed, the first grand prize winning opening 8 or the second big winning prize opening 9 is closed, and the round game may end. It should be noted that the maximum number of times of opening and the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 8 or the second big prize opening 9 in each round game may or may not be unified for each big hit game.

(Description of game conditions)
Next, game conditions that are conditions when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability and the start opening winning easiness are set as the game conditions. As for the jackpot winning probability, the game progresses under the low-probability gaming state or the high-probability gaming state, and the game ball progresses under the short-time gaming state or the non-short-time gaming state with respect to the ease of winning the game opening. To do. The initial (power-on) gaming conditions are set to a low probability gaming state and a non-short-time gaming state, and this low probability gaming state and a non-time-short gaming state are referred to as a normal gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the low-probability gaming state with respect to the jackpot winning probability means that the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot determination is set to be relatively disadvantageous to the player at 1/350. On the other hand, the high probability gaming state is that the jackpot winning probability is higher than the low probability gaming state, that is, set to 1/80 which is relatively advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the jackpot winning probability is in a high probability gaming state, winning a jackpot is easier than in the low probability gaming state, and the number of winning jackpots per unit time is relatively large, which is advantageous to the player. It can be said that it is a state.

  The non-time-saving gaming state is a state in which the start opening winning easiness is normal. Specifically, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the normal time variation time is set to 15 seconds, and the operation time (second start time) of the second start port control device 70 that operates when “winning” is won in the winning determination. The total of the opening time of the mouth 7) is set to 0.2 seconds, and the probability of winning in the hit determination for the normal symbol is set to 1/50. Note that the “total opening time” is that the second start port 7 may be opened multiple times for each win, and a game ball can be won for each win. This is because the number is limited, and when a game ball is won, it closes without waiting for the opening time.

  On the other hand, in the short-time gaming state, the opening time of the second starting port 7 per unit time (the operating time of the second starting port control device 70) is longer than in the non-short-time gaming state, and the second starting port 7 Is a gaming state that tends to be open. Due to the relatively high start opening prize ease, the number of times the second special symbol determination can be performed per unit time increases. Under the same jackpot winning probability, the number of executions of the second special symbol determination per unit time inevitably increases the number of winning jackpots per unit time. It can be said that this is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the gaming state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the short-time gaming state, the normal variation time is set to 3.0 seconds, the total maximum opening time of the second start port 7 is set to 5.2 seconds, The probability of winning is set to 1/5. That is, all the components of the start opening winning ease are set to be more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving gaming state. In the short-time gaming state, the second start port 7 is opened twice via a 1.0 second closure (interval). However, there is no such closure, and it may be opened only once. Moreover, the closure may be provided a plurality of times.

  In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the start openings 6 and 7, three prize balls can be obtained, but the player fires the game ball by operating the appropriate launch handle 32. However, the number of game balls possessed by the player tends to decrease. However, in the short-time gaming state, since it is easier to enter the second starting port 7 than in the non-short-time gaming state, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of game balls possessed by the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of game balls possessed by the player, the short-time game state is set to be more advantageous for the player than the non-short-time game state.

  When the jackpot is won, the normal game state is set when the jackpot game starts regardless of the state before the jackpot game. That is, during the jackpot game, the low probability game state and the non-short-time game state are entered. On the other hand, even if winning a small win, the game conditions do not change. That is, the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is continued as it is during the small hit game and after the small hit game.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG.

  When power is supplied from the power supply board 107, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101a, and the main CPU 101a performs the following main processing.

  In step S10, the main CPU 101a clears the use area of the main RAM 101c, sets an initial value in the work area of the main RAM 101c that requires an initial value at the time of initialization, and performs setting processing of the main RAM 101c when backup is not valid. At the same time, initial setting of peripheral devices of the main CPU 101a is performed.

  In step S20, the main CPU 101a updates the special figure fluctuation random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display of the special symbol composed of the reach determination random number and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number. .

  In step S30, the main CPU 101a updates an initial value random number including an initial value random number for jackpot determination, an initial value random number for special symbol determination, an initial value random number for hit determination, and the like. Thereafter, the processes of step S20 and step S30 are repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG. The following timer interrupt processing is executed by generating a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 101.

  First, in step S100, the main CPU 101a saves the information stored in the register of the main CPU 101a to the stack area.

  In step S110, the main CPU 101a updates the special symbol change time, the special symbol stop time update processing, the opening time update processing, and the first big winning port 8 and the second big winning port 9 opening and closing time. A special game timer counter that performs processing, etc., and an auxiliary game timer counter that performs normal symbol variation time update processing, normal symbol stop time update processing, and second opening 7 opening / closing time update processing, etc. The time control process to update is performed.

  In step S120, the main CPU 101a updates a specific random number including a jackpot determining random number, a special symbol determining random number, and a winning determining random number.

  In step S130, the main CPU 101a performs an initial value random number update process for updating the jackpot determining initial value random number, the special symbol initial value random number, and the winning determination initial value random number.

  For updating various random numbers, the random number is updated by adding “1” to a random number counter provided for each type of random number. Various random numbers have a random number range. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value determined for the random number. In the update of the random number, when the random number indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, the random number counter is reset to “0” without adding “1”, and each random number value is newly updated from the initial random number at that time Update to

  In step S200, the main CPU 101a performs input control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process for determining whether or not a new valid signal is transmitted from a predetermined detection sensor. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S300, the main CPU 101a displays the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the first special symbol hold display device 23, the second special symbol hold display device 24, and the first big prize opening control device 80. And the special figure special electric control process (special symbol related process) for performing the control (control of the special symbol system device) of the second big prize winning control device 90 is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S400, the main CPU 101a performs a normal signal normal power control process (normal signal control) for controlling the normal symbol display device 22, the normal symbol hold display device 25, and the second starting port control device 70 (control of the normal symbol system device). Perform symbolic processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S500, the main CPU 101a performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a receives a winning ball counter corresponding to the starting port (first starting port 6, second starting port 7), first first winning port 8, second second winning port 9, and general winning port 11. It is checked whether or not “0” exceeds “0”. If it exceeds “0”, a prize ball request signal indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening is transmitted to the payout control board 103. When a prize ball signal is transmitted, an update process for subtracting “1” from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

  In step S600, the main CPU 101a performs external signal output data creation processing for creating external signal output data for outputting predetermined game information as an external signal to an external device such as the game information display device 700.

  In step S600, the main CPU 101a controls the driving control data (starting port opening / closing solenoid driving data for driving the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 70B, the first large winning port opening / closing solenoid 80B, and the second large winning port opening / closing solenoid 90B). Drive control data creation processing for creating a prize winning opening / closing solenoid drive data). Further, in step S600, the main CPU 101a displays display control data (special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, normal symbol display data, for displaying predetermined symbols on the symbol display devices 20, 21, 22 and the hold display devices 23, 24, 25). Display control data creation processing for creating special symbol hold display data and normal symbol hold display data) is performed.

  In step S700, the main CPU 101a performs output control processing. In this process, first, a port output process for outputting a signal based on the external signal output data and the drive control data created in S600 is performed. Subsequently, in order to light each LED of the symbol display devices 20, 21, and 22 and the hold display devices 23, 24, and 25, display device output processing for outputting a signal based on the display control data created in step S600 is performed. . Finally, command transmission processing for transmitting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101c to another board is also performed.

  In step S800, the main CPU 101a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 101a.

  The input control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S210, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a general winning opening detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening 11. When the main CPU 101a does not input a detection signal from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S220. When the main CPU 101a receives a detection signal from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the main CPU 101a updates the general winning opening prize ball counter used for winning balls by adding predetermined data.

  In step S220, the main CPU 101a has input a big prize opening detection signal from the big prize opening detection sensor 8a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the first big prize opening 8 or the second big prize opening 9. Determine whether. When the main CPU 101a has not input a detection signal from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S230. When the main CPU 101a receives a detection signal from the big prize opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a adds and updates predetermined data to the big prize mouth prize ball counter used for the prize ball and updates the first big prize hole 8 Alternatively, the counter value of the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls won in the second large winning opening 9 is added and updated.

  In step S230, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first start port detection signal from the first start port detection sensor 6a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 6. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S240, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second start port detection signal from the second start port detection sensor 7a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second start port 7. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S250, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the winning gate detection signal from the winning gate detection sensor 10a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed the winning gate 10. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S260, the main CPU 101a determines whether the specific area detection signal from the specific area detection sensor 12a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the specific area 12. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the first start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S231, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first start port detection signal is input. If it is determined that the first start port detection signal has not been input, the process ends. If it is determined that the first start port detection signal has been input, the start port prize ball counter is incremented by “1” in step S232. And the first start port winning flag is turned ON in the first start port entering flag storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S233, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the first special figure hold number counter for counting the first special figure hold number (U1) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U1) is not less than 4, the main CPU 101a terminates the processing. If the main CPU 101a determines that the first special figure hold number (U1) is smaller than 4, the first special figure hold in step S234. The counter value of the number counter is updated by adding “1”. In step S234, the main CPU 101a displays special symbol hold display data indicating the number of holds in the main RAM 101c in order to update the first special figure hold number (U1) displayed on the first special symbol hold display device 23. Set to a predetermined area.

  In step S235, the main CPU 101a stores the random numbers indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, the special symbol determination random number counter, the reach determination random number counter, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random number counter in the first special symbol holding storage area. To do.

  As shown in FIG. 15A, the special symbol reservation storage area is provided for each type of starting port (first special symbol reservation storage area and second special symbol reservation storage area). It is divided into the 1st storage part-the 4th storage part for every kind of starting mouths 6 and 7, and various random numbers and flags are from a storage part with a small number in a storage part in which random numbers and a flag are not memorized. It is memorized in order. Each storage unit is divided into regions for each stored random number and flag (see FIG. 15B).

  In step S236, the main CPU 101a performs a first preliminary determination process based on a game ball entering the first start port 6. Here, the first preliminary determination process will be described.

  Specifically, in the first pre-determination process, based on the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number, and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol hold storage area The first special figure variation pattern is determined. That is, the main CPU 101a determines the first special figure variation pattern as the first pre-determination process before performing the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process (S313).

  In step S237, the main CPU 101a sets the first start opening winning designation command corresponding to the first special figure variation pattern determined in the first pre-determination process in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. To do.

  Next, the second start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S241, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a second start port detection signal has been input. If the main CPU 101a determines that the second start port detection signal is not input, the main CPU 101a ends the process. If the main CPU 101a determines that the second start port detection signal is input, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S242.

  In step S242, the main CPU 101a updates the start opening prize ball counter by adding “1”, updates the second start opening entrance ball regulation counter by adding “1”, and also updates the second start opening of the main RAM 101c. The second starting entrance ball flag is turned ON in the winning flag storage area. The second starting entrance counting rule counter counts the number of winnings to the second starting entrance 7 in one auxiliary game. This is because, in the present embodiment, the number of balls entering the second starting port 7 for a single auxiliary game is limited.

  In step S243, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol reservation number counter for counting the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U2) is not smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a ends the process. If the main CPU 101a determines that the second special figure reservation number (U2) is smaller than 4, the process proceeds to step S244.

  In step S244, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the counter value (U2) of the second special figure pending number counter and updates it. Further, in step S244, the main CPU 101a updates the second special symbol hold number (U2) displayed on the second special symbol hold display device 24 in step S244 to display the special symbol hold display data indicating the hold number in the main RAM 101c. Set to a predetermined area.

  In step S245, the main CPU 101a stores the random number values indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, the special symbol determination random number counter, the reach determination random number counter, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random number counter in the second special symbol holding storage area. Remember.

  The second special symbol reserved storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 15A), and various random numbers and flags are stored in a storage unit in which no random numbers and flags are stored. The number is stored in order from the storage unit with the smallest number. Each storage unit is divided into regions for each stored random number and flag (see FIG. 15B).

  And main CPU101a performs the 2nd prior determination process based on the entrance into the 2nd starting port 7 in step S246. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the second prior determination process will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S246-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the high probability flag is ON, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability gaming state. If the main CPU 101a determines that the high probability flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S246-8. If the main CPU 101a determines that the high probability flag is ON, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S246-2.

  In step S246-2, the main CPU 101a displays the counter value of the high-probability gaming state remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of times of display of the special symbol variation display due to the high-probability gaming state (X: hereinafter referred to as “the remaining number of high-probability gaming states”) In step S246-3, the current second special figure reservation number (U2) is confirmed.

In step S246-4, the main CPU 101a performs the second pre-judgment currently being performed based on the high-probability gaming state remaining number and the second special figure hold number confirmed in steps S246-2 and S246-3. The number of planned fluctuations of the second special figure hold related to is calculated.
Note that the planned number of fluctuations is the special figure that was executed after the current high probability gaming state was set when the special figure fluctuation display scheduled to be executed for the second special figure hold was actually executed. This is the number of times the figure is changed.
For example, in the case where the number of possible executions of the high probability gaming state is set to 100, the current state is the number of remaining high probability gaming states two times, and one game ball enters the second start port 7. Assuming that the number of the 2nd special figure hold is 4 and the number of special figure fluctuation display executed after the current high probability gaming state is set, the number of executions of the high probability gaming state and the high probability Based on the remaining number of times that the game state can be executed, it is 98 times (100 times-2 times), and the current number of second special figure holds is four. The expected number of fluctuations is 102 (98 + 4).

In step S246-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the calculated number of fluctuations calculated in step S246-4 is 101 times or more. If the main CPU 101a determines that the expected variation is 101 times or more, it moves the process to step S246-7, and if it determines that it is not more than 101 times, it moves the process to step S246-6.
In addition, since the number of executable times of the high probability gaming state of the present embodiment is 100 times, this 101 times is set to 101 times that is a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of executable times of the high probability gaming state. Yes.

  In step S246-6, the main CPU 101a further selects a “second high probability jackpot determination table” from the second special figure jackpot determination table.

  In step S246-7, the main CPU 101a sets the specific variation flag in the specific variation flag storage area of the second special symbol holding storage area.

  In step S246-8, the main CPU 101a further selects a “second low probability jackpot determination table” from the second special figure jackpot determination table.

  In step S246-9, the main CPU 101a selects the “second high probability jackpot determination table” or “second low probability jackpot determination table” selected in step S246-6 or step S246-8 as the random number for jackpot determination. The jackpot prior determination is performed to determine whether the jackpot is a jackpot, a jackpot, or a loss.

  In step S246-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot advance determination in step S246-9 is "big hit". If it is determined that the game is a “hit”, the main CPU 101a selects a special symbol determination table for winning a jackpot in step S246-17. If it is not determined that it is a “hit”, step S246- The processing is moved to 11.

  In step S246-11, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the big hit prior determination in step S246-9 is "small win". If it is determined that “small hit” is selected, the main CPU 101a selects a special symbol determination table for winning a small hit in step S246-18. The process moves to step S246-12.

  In step S246-12, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the specific variation flag is set in the specific variation flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the specific variation flag is set, it moves the process to step S246-13 and selects the second reach determination table. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not set, the process proceeds to step S246-14, and the first reach determination table is selected.

  In step S246-15, the main CPU 101a checks the reach determination random value against the “second reach determination table” or “first reach determination table” selected in step S246-13 or step S246-14. , Reach in advance.

  In step S246-16, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not “reach is present” is determined as a result of the reach prior determination in step S246-15. If it is determined that “reach is present”, the process proceeds to step S246-19, and a special symbol determination table for reach loss is selected. On the other hand, if it is not “reach”, that is, it is determined that “no reach”, the process proceeds to step S246-20, and a special symbol determination table for loss without reach is selected.

  In step S246-21, the main CPU 101a checks the special symbol determination random number against the special symbol determination table selected in steps S246-17 to S246-20, and is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 20, 21. Special symbol pre-determining to determine the special symbol.

  In step S246-22, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the specific variation flag is set in the specific variation flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the specific variation flag is set, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S246-28, and selects the special figure variation pattern determination table for the normal period. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not set, the process proceeds to step S246-23.

  In step S246-23, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the high probability flag is ON. If the main CPU 101a determines that the high probability flag is ON, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S246-26, and selects the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the first and second specific periods. On the other hand, if it is determined that the high probability flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S246-24.

  In step S246-24, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the time reduction flag is turned on. If the main CPU 101a determines that the time reduction flag is ON, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S246-26, and selects the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the first and second specific periods. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time reduction flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S246-25.

  In step S246-25, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the third specific period flag is ON. If the main CPU 101a determines that the third specific period flag is ON, it moves the process to step S246-27, and selects the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the third specific period. On the other hand, if it is determined that the third specific period flag is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S246-28, and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal period is selected.

  In step S246-29, the main CPU 101a confirms the special symbol stop data related to the special symbol based on the result of the special symbol preliminary determination in step S246-21, and performs step S246-26, step S246-27 or step S246- The special figure stop pattern data is collated with the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table selected in 28 to determine the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table. This is because in the present embodiment, the special figure variation pattern determination table divided according to the type of period is further divided according to special figure stop data.

  In addition, when the special figure stop data is “19H” or “29H”, that is, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss without reach, the special figure pending number (U1 or U2) related to the special figure fluctuation pattern prior determination The special figure variation pattern determination table is determined based on the above. This is because, in the present embodiment, the special figure variation pattern determination table related to the reachless loss is also divided according to the special figure reservation number.

  If the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is determined, in step S246-30, the main CPU 101a collates the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number with the determined special figure fluctuation pattern determination table to determine the special figure fluctuation pattern. Pre-determination of figure variation pattern is performed.

  In step S247, the main CPU 101a sets the second start opening winning designation command corresponding to the second special figure variation pattern determined in the second pre-determination process in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. To do.

  Next, the winning gate detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S251, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a winning gate detection signal is input. If the main CPU 101a determines that the winning gate detection signal is not input, the main CPU 101a ends the processing. If the main CPU 101a determines that the winning gate detection signal is input, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S252.

  In step S252, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the normal symbol holding number counter for counting the number of normal symbol holdings (G) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (G) is not smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a ends the process. If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (G) is smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S253.

  In step S 253, the main CPU 101 a adds “1” to the counter value (G) of the usual figure holding number counter and updates it. In step S253, the main CPU 101a updates the normal symbol hold number (G) displayed on the normal symbol hold display device 25 in the predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to update the normal symbol hold number (G). set.

  In step S254, the main CPU 101a stores the random numbers indicated by the hit determination random number counter, the normal symbol determination random number counter, and the normal variation pattern determination random number counter in the normal symbol holding storage area, and performs the winning gate detection signal input process. Exit.

  The normal symbol holding storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 14C), and various random numbers are stored in a storage unit having a small number among storage units in which no random number is stored. It is memorized in order. Each storage unit is divided into regions for each stored random number (see FIG. 14D).

  Next, the specific area detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S261, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a specific area detection signal has been input. If the main CPU 101a determines that the specific area detection signal is not input, the main CPU 101a ends the process. If the main CPU 101a determines that the specific area detection signal is input, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S262.

  In step S262, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a big hit game is currently being played, that is, whether or not special figure special processing data described later = 3. If the main CPU 101a determines that it is not currently playing a jackpot game, it moves the process to step S265, and if it determines that it is currently playing a jackpot game, it moves the process to step S263.

  In step S263, the main CPU 101a turns on the high probability state designation flag in the high probability state designation flag of the main RAM 101c. Then, the specific area detection signal input process ends.

  The fact that the high probability state designation flag is ON means that the game ball has passed through the specific area 12 during the jackpot game. As will be described later, a high probability state is set in the jackpot game based on the high probability state designation flag being turned on.

  In step S265, the sub CPU 102a sets a big hit non-game specific area winning designation command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c, and ends the specific area detection signal input processing.

  With reference to FIG. 23, the special figure special power control process will be described. In step S301, the value of the special figure special electricity processing data is loaded, and the branch address is referred to from the special figure special electric treatment data loaded in step S302. If special figure special electric treatment data = 0, the special symbol memory determination process (step S310). If the special symbol special power processing data = 1, the processing shifts to the special symbol variation processing (step S320). If the special symbol special power processing data = 2, the processing shifts to the special symbol stop processing (step S330). If special figure special electric processing data = 3, the process shifts to jackpot game processing (step S340), and if special figure special electric processing data = 4, the process moves to small hit game processing (step S350). If data = 5, the process proceeds to the special game end process (step S360). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The special symbol memory determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol is being variably displayed. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol variation display is in progress, the main CPU 101a ends the processing. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol variation display is not in progress, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step 310-2.

  In step S310-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second special figure holding number (U2) is 1 or more. If it is determined that the second special figure hold number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4. If it is determined that the second special figure hold number (U2) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-3. Move processing.

  In step S310-3, the main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the second special symbol hold count counter by subtracting “1”, and in step S310-6, the data stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is shifted. Processing is performed, and each data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

  For example, the data stored in the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area. The data stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol storage area is shifted to the special symbol common storage area (the 0th storage unit) common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The data stored in the 0 storage unit is deleted. Thereby, the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value used in the previous game are deleted. Furthermore, the stop symbol data and game condition data used in the previous game are also erased from the corresponding storage areas.

  On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first special figure hold number (U1) is 1 or more. If the main CPU 101a determines in step S310-4 that the first special figure hold number (U1) is 1 or more, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S310-5.

  The main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the first special symbol reservation number counter by subtracting “1” in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, shifts the data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area. I do.

  For example, data stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the data stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol holding storage area is shifted to the special symbol storage area (the 0th storage unit), and the data stored in the 0th storage unit is erased. Is done. Thereby, the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value used in the previous game are deleted. Furthermore, the stop symbol data and game condition data used in the previous game are also erased from the corresponding storage areas.

  In addition, in order to update the 1st special figure reservation number (U1) or the 2nd special figure reservation number (U2) with the data shift process (the suspension digestion process) in step S310-6, specifically, Sets the first and second special symbol hold display data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to change the display contents of the special symbol hold display devices 23 and 24 corresponding to the type of the start port related to the data. The hold display data includes information on the type of the special symbol hold display device and information on the special symbol hold number (U1 or U2).

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol reservation storage area is shifted in priority to the first special symbol reservation storage area in steps S310-2 to S310-6, but the game ball enters the start port. The first special symbol reserved storage area or the second special symbol reserved storage area may be shifted in the order of the balls, or the first special symbol reserved storage area may be shifted with priority over the second special symbol reserved storage area. May be.

  If it is determined in step S310-4 that the first special symbol hold number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to steps S319-1 to S319-3 to set the customer waiting state. Wait state setting processing is performed. The customer waiting state refers to a state in which special symbol variation display and special games are not executed.

  As the customer waiting state setting process, the main CPU 101a first determines whether or not the customer waiting state determination flag “01H” is set in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area in step S319-1. When the customer waiting state determination flag “01H” is set in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area, the main CPU 101a ends the special symbol storage determination process, and determines the customer waiting state determination in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area. If the flag “01H” is not set, the process proceeds to step S319-2.

  In step S319-2, the main CPU 101a sets the customer waiting state determination flag “01H” in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area because the customer waiting state is not repeatedly set.

  In step S319-3, the main CPU 101a sets a customer waiting state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol memory determination process.

  In step S311, the main CPU 101a executes jackpot determination processing based on the data shifted in step S310-6 and newly stored in the 0th storage unit.

  Here, the jackpot determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S311-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether the jackpot determination process is performed based on a game ball entering the first start port 6.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-1 that it is the first start port 6, the first special symbol jackpot determination table is selected in step S311-2. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101a determines that it is not the first start port 6 (is the second start port 7) in step S311-1, the second special symbol jackpot determination table is selected in step S311-3.

  Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. Here, the fact that the flag is turned on in the high-probability flag storage area means that the current jackpot winning probability is a high-probability gaming state.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-4 that the flag is ON in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-5, the main CPU 101a further selects “from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3”. The “first high probability jackpot determination table” or the “second high probability jackpot determination table” is selected.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101a determines that the flag is not turned on in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-6, the “first low probability” is further selected from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. "Big jackpot determination table" or "Second low probability jackpot determination table" is selected.

  In step S311-7, the main CPU 101a shifts the jackpot determination random number in the 0th storage unit after being shifted in step S310-6 to the “high probability jackpot selected in step S311-5 or step S311-6”. It is checked against the “determination table” or “low probability jackpot determination table” to determine whether it is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”, and the jackpot determination processing ends.

  When the big hit determination process ends, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 24, and performs the special symbol determination process in step S312. In the special symbol determination process, a special symbol that is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination process. Here, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S312-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is “jackpot”. If it is determined that the game is a “hit”, the main CPU 101a selects a special symbol determination table for winning a jackpot in step S312-9. If it is not determined that it is a “hit”, step S312— The process is moved to 2.

  In step S312-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the big hit determination is “small hit”. If it is determined that “small hit” is selected, the main CPU 101a selects a special symbol determination table for winning a small hit in step S312-10. The process moves to step S312-3.

  In step S312-3, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the specific variation flag is set in the specific variation flag storage area of the 0th storage unit of the main RAM 101c. If it is determined that the specific variation flag is set, the process proceeds to step S312-5, and the second reach determination table is selected. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not set, the process proceeds to step S312-6, and the first reach determination table is selected.

  In step S312-7, the main CPU 101a performs reach determination. More specifically, the reach determination random number value shifted in step S310-6 and stored in the 0th storage unit is selected from the “second reach determination table” or “second” selected in step S312-5 or step S312-6. Check against the “1 reach determination table”.

  In step S312-8, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not “reach is present” is determined as a result of the reach determination in step S312-7. If it is determined that “reach is present”, the process proceeds to step S312-11 to select a special symbol determination table for loss with reach. On the other hand, if it is determined that “not reach”, ie, “not reach” is determined, the process proceeds to step S312-12, and a special symbol determination table for loss without reach is selected.

  In step S312-13, the main CPU 101a confirms the start port related to the processing based on the flag turned on in the start port winning flag storage area (first start port 6 or second start port 7), and step S312- At 14, based on the type of the start port, either the special symbol determination table for the first start port or the special symbol determination table for the second start port is selected.

  In step S312-15, the main CPU 101a performs a special symbol determination in which the special symbol determination random number value shifted in step S310-6 and stored in the 0th storage unit is compared with the selected special symbol determination table.

  In step S312-16, an effect symbol designation command is determined based on the result of the special symbol determination in step S312-15, and the determined effect symbol designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  Next, in step S312-2, the main CPU 101a determines the stop symbol data related to the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol stop data") based on the result of the special symbol determination in step S312-15, that is, the special symbol. The type is determined, and the determined special figure stop data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  As will be described later, when the special figure change pattern is determined in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process of FIG. 27, the determined special figure stop data is determined to be “special bonus special symbol” or “special bonus hit” in the special symbol stop process of FIG. When determining “design” or the like, it is also used when determining the opening / closing mode of the first big winning port 8 and the second big winning port 9 in the big hit game processing of FIG. 30 or the small hit game processing of FIG.

  In step S312-18, the main CPU 101a sets the game state data indicating the current game state in the game state buffer of the main RAM 101c, and ends the special symbol determination process. The gaming state data is the gaming state data 1 (= 01H) if the current state is the low probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, and the gaming state data 2 (= 02H) if the current state is the high-probability gaming state and the non-time-short gaming state. If the low-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the gaming state data 3 (= 03H), and if the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the gaming state data 4 (= 04H).

  When the special symbol determination process is completed as described above, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 24, and performs the special symbol variation pattern determination process in step S313. In the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process, a special figure fluctuation pattern including information on the special figure fluctuation time and the effect type of the fluctuating effect described later, based on the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the special symbol determination, and the result of the reach determination is generated. decide.

  The special figure variation pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the specific variation flag is set in the specific variation flag storage area of the 0th storage unit of the main RAM 101c. If it is determined that the specific variation flag is set, the process proceeds to step S313-7 to select a special figure variation pattern determination table for the normal period. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not set, the process proceeds to step S313-2.

  In step S313-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the high probability flag is ON. If the main CPU 101a determines that the high probability flag is ON, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S313-5, and selects the special figure variation pattern determination table for the first and second specific periods. On the other hand, if it is determined that the high probability flag is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S313-3.

  In step S313-3, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the time reduction flag is turned on. If the main CPU 101a determines that the time reduction flag is ON, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S313-5, and selects the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the first and second specific periods. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time reduction flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S313-4.

  In step S313-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the third specific period flag is ON. If the main CPU 101a determines that the third specific period flag is ON, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S313-6, and selects the special figure variation pattern determination table for the third specific period. On the other hand, if it is determined that the third specific period flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S313-7, and the special period fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal period is selected.

  In step S313-8, the main CPU 101a confirms the special figure stop data stored in the main RAM 101c, and stores it in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table selected in step S313-5, step S313-6 or step S313-7. The special figure stop data is collated, and a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is determined based on the special figure stop data. This is because in the present embodiment, the special figure variation pattern determination table divided according to the type of period is further divided according to special figure stop data.

  In addition, when the special figure stop data is “19H” or “29H”, that is, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss without reach, the special figure pending number related to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process (U1orU2) The special figure variation pattern determination table is determined based on the above. This is because, in the present embodiment, the special figure variation pattern determination table related to the reachless loss is also divided according to the special figure reservation number.

  If the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is determined, the main CPU 101a performs special figure fluctuation pattern determination in step S313-9. Specifically, a special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number is collated with the determined special figure fluctuation pattern determination table to determine a special figure fluctuation pattern.

  When the special CPU variation pattern is determined, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 24. In step S310-7, the special CPU variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern is transmitted for the effect in the main RAM 101c. Set in the data storage area. The special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the production control board 102. Upon receiving this command, the production control board 102 recognizes that the special symbol fluctuation display starts, and finally designates the special figure fluctuation pattern designation. Based on the command, the variation effect pattern associated with the content of the variation effect is determined.

  In step S310-8, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the gaming conditions at the start of the variable symbol display of the special symbol, and sets a gaming state designation command reflecting the state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c. .

  In step S310-9, the main CPU 101a sets the special figure change time (see FIGS. 11 to 13) associated with the special figure change pattern in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S310-10, the main CPU 101a sets special symbol variation display data in order to perform variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21. The special symbol variation display data includes information such as the type of the special symbol display device to be operated, the variation display mode, and the variation time.

  In step S310-11, the main CPU 101a sets a flag “00H” in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area, that is, clears the customer waiting state determination flag storage area. In step S310-12, the special figure special electric processing data = 1 is set, and the special symbol memory determination process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol variation process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol variation display is terminated in step S310-9, in other words, whether or not the set special symbol variation time has elapsed (special). Game timer counter = 0). As a result, if it is determined that the special symbol variation display does not end, the special symbol variation processing is terminated, and the next subroutine is executed.

  If the main CPU 101a determines that the variation display of the special symbol is finished, in step S320-2, the main CPU 101a uses a production symbol stop designation command to notify the production control board 102 that the variation display of the special symbol is terminated. Set in the transmission data storage area.

  In step S320-3, the main CPU 101a displays special figure stop display data based on the special figure stop data set in step S312-13 in order to stop and display the special symbols on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21. set. Thereby, the result of the special symbol lottery is notified to the player. In step S320-4, the main CPU 101a sets the time required for the special symbol stop display (hereinafter referred to as "special figure stop time", for example, 0.5 seconds) to the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110. The special figure stop time is set uniformly as 0.5 seconds, but can be set to a different time depending on the gaming state, for example.

  In step S320-5, the main CPU 101a sets 2 in the special figure special electricity processing data, and in step S320-6, turns off the first starting opening prize flag or the second starting opening prize flag, and the special symbol variation process. Exit.

  The special symbol stop process will be described with reference to FIG. First, the main CPU 101a first determines whether or not the special symbol stop display ends in step S330-1, in other words, the special figure stop time set in the special game timer counter in step S320-4 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (special game timer counter = 0?). As a result, if it is determined that the special symbol stop display does not end, the special symbol stop processing is ended. If it is determined that the special symbol stop display ends, the process proceeds to step S330-2.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is turned on in the time reduction flag storage area. The fact that the flag is ON in the time-short flag storage area means that the current state is the time-short game state. If the flag is turned on in the time reduction flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-3. If the flag is turned off in the time reduction flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-6.

  In step S330-3, the main CPU 101a calculates “1” from the counter value of the remaining number counter in the short time gaming state indicating the remaining number of times the special symbol change display according to the short time gaming state (J: hereinafter referred to as “the remaining number of short time gaming states”). The operation value (J-1) obtained by subtracting "is stored as the remaining time-saving gaming state count (J).

  In step S330-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the remaining time-saving gaming state count (J) = 0. If the remaining time-saving gaming state (J) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-5. If the remaining time-short gaming state remaining number (J) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-6.

  In step S330-5, the main CPU 101a turns off the flag stored in the time reduction flag storage area. It should be noted that the fact that the short time gaming state remaining number (J) is “0” means that the special symbol is displayed in a variable number of times (Ja) in the short time gaming state. Means to end.

  In step S330-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. The fact that the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area means that the current state is a high probability gaming state. If the flag is ON in the high probability flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-7. If the flag is OFF in the high probability flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-10.

  In step S330-7, the main CPU 101a displays the counter value of the high-probability gaming state remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of times of display of the special symbol variation display due to the high-probability gaming state (X: hereinafter referred to as “the remaining number of high-probability gaming states”). The operation value (X−1) obtained by subtracting “1” from the value is stored as a new high probability gaming state remaining number (X).

  In step S330-8, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the high probability gaming state remaining count (X) = 0. If the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-9. If the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) = 0 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S330-10.

  In step S330-9, the main CPU 101a turns off the flag stored in the high probability flag storage area. Note that the high probability gaming state remaining count (X) is “0” means that the special symbol is displayed in a variable number of executable times (Xa) in the high probability gaming state, and the special symbol based on the “high probability” state. This means that the fluctuation display of is finished.

  In step S330-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is turned on in the period specifying flag storage area. The fact that the flag is turned on in the period specifying flag storage area means that it is currently a specific period after the special game. If the flag is turned on in the period specifying flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-11. If the flag is turned off in the period specifying flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-14.

  In step S330-11, the main CPU 101a shifts to the specific period, and then the counter of the specific period execution number counter indicating the number of times the special symbol variation display is executed (T: hereinafter referred to as “specific period execution number”). The calculated value (T-1) obtained by subtracting “1” from the value is stored as a new number of remaining specific periods (T).

  In step S330-12, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the specific period execution count (T) = predetermined value. If the specific period execution count (T) = predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S330-13. If the specific period execution count (T) = predetermined value, the process proceeds to step S330-14. The predetermined value is set in advance according to the type of the specific period.

  In step S330-13, the main CPU 101a performs a specific period clear process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a turns off the period specifying flag and clears the count value of the specific period execution count counter (= 0).

  In step S330-14, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current gaming condition, and sets a gaming state designation command indicating the gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area.

  In step S330-15, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol stop process is “jackpot”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special figure stop data stored in the special figure stop data storage area relates to the jackpot special symbol (special figure stop data = 11 to 14, 21). If it is determined that the jackpot special symbol is determined, the process proceeds to step S330-18. If the jackpot special symbol is not determined, the process proceeds to step S330-16.

  In step S330-16, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol stop process is “small hit”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special figure stop data stored in the special figure stop data storage area relates to a small bonus special symbol (special figure stop data = 16). Here, if it is determined that the symbol is a small hit special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-21. If it is not determined to be a small bonus special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-17.

  In step S330-17, the main CPU 101a sets 0 to the special symbol special electric processing data, and shifts the processing to the special symbol memory determination processing shown in FIG.

  In step S330-18, the main CPU 101a sets 3 to the special figure special electricity processing data, and in step S330-19 performs a gaming state period reset process. In the gaming state period reset process, the main CPU 101a has a gaming condition flag storage area (time-short flag storage area and high-probability flag storage area), a high-probability gaming state remaining variation counter, a short-time gaming state remaining variation counter, and The period specifying flag storage area and the remaining fluctuation counter for the specified period are cleared.

  In step S330-20, the main CPU 101a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the special figure stop data in the effect transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 101a sets the opening time corresponding to the special figure stop data in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S330-21, the main CPU 101a sets 4 in the special figure special electricity processing data, and moves the process to step S330-20.

  The jackpot game process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently opening. Here, the term “opening” refers to a period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game (the first opening of the first big winning opening 8 or the second big winning opening 9). If it is determined that the current opening is being performed, the process proceeds to step S340-2. If it is determined that the current opening is not currently performed, the process proceeds to step S340-6.

  In step S340-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and if the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the set opening time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process is terminated, the next subroutine is executed, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-3. .

  In step S340-3, the main CPU 101a performs a jackpot game start process. Specifically, according to the special figure stop data, which jackpot is confirmed, a jackpot opening / closing control table corresponding to the jackpot type is selected and set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Specifically, the first jackpot gaming big prize opening / closing control table to the fourth jackpot gaming big prize opening / closing control table are set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c according to the special figure stop data. Next, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the value (round number (R)) stored in the round game number storage area and stores the value. Since the round game has not been executed at the time of step S340-3, the main CPU 101a stores “1” in the round game count storage area.

  In step S340-4, the main CPU 101a performs a special prize opening process. Specifically, “1” is added to the value stored in the special electric operation number storage area (special electric operation number (K)) and stored. The main CPU 101a opens / closes the big prize opening in order to energize the first big prize opening / closing solenoid 80B or the second big prize opening / closing solenoid 90B to open the first big prize opening 8 or the second big prize opening 9. The solenoid energization start data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Here, the main CPU 101a refers to the special winning opening / closing control table determined in step 340-3, and based on the round number (R) and the special operation number (K), The opening time of the second grand prize opening 9 (the operation time of the first big prize opening control device 80 or the second big prize opening control device 90) is set in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S340-5, the main CPU 101a performs a round designation command transmission determination process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not K = 1. If K = 1, a round designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area. This is because information indicating that the round game starts is transmitted to the effect control board 102. For example, at the first release of the first round game of the first jackpot game, “1” is set in the round game number storage area, and “1” is set in the special operation number storage area. A round designation command indicating the first round game is set in the effect transmission data storage area. On the other hand, if “1” is not set in the special operation number storage area, the big hit game process is terminated without setting the round designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. That is, since the case where K = 1 means the start of a round game, the main CPU 101a transmits a round designation command only at the start of the round. When the effect control board 102 receives the round designation command, an effect display is performed on the image display device 14 such as “ROUND1”.

  In step S340-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently ending. Ending here refers to the period from the completion of all previously set round games (after the final opening of the first grand prize opening 8 or the second big prize opening 9 is completed) to the end of the jackpot game. Refers to the period. Therefore, if it is determined that the current ending is in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-17, where it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the current ending is not currently in progress, step S340-7 is performed. Move processing to.

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first big prize opening 8 or the second big prize opening 9 is open, that is, the first big prize opening control device 80 or the second big prize opening control device. It is determined whether 90 is in operation. If the main CPU 101a determines that the first grand prize winning port 8 or the second grand prize winning port 9 is open, the main CPU 101a opens the first grand prize winning port 8 or the second grand prize winning port 9 in step S340-8. It is determined whether or not the “opening end condition” for ending is satisfied. As the “opening end condition”, the counter value of the round winning counter has reached a specified number (for example, 9) in the round game, or the maximum open time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0) ) Is adopted. If it is determined that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S340-9. If it is determined that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied, the jackpot game process is ended.

  In step S340-9, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening closing process. In the big prize opening closing process, in order to close the first big prize opening 8 or the second big prize opening 9, the energization stop data of the first big prize opening / closing solenoid 80B or the second big prize opening / closing solenoid 90B is stored in the sub-RAM 102c. The first prize winning opening is set based on the current round number (R) and the special operation number (K) with reference to the big winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step 340-3. 8 or the closing time of the second grand prize opening 9 is set in the special game timer counter. Thereby, the 1st grand prize opening 8 or the 2nd big prize opening 9 is closed.

  In step S340-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not one round game has ended. Specifically, in one round game, the special electric operation number (K) is the number of times of opening set in the round game, or the counter value (C) of the round winning counter is a specified number (for example, 9) ) Is terminated on the condition that it has been reached, it is determined whether or not such a condition is satisfied. If it is determined that one round game has been completed, the process proceeds to step S340-12. If it is determined that one round has not been completed, the jackpot game process is ended.

  When the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-7 that the first grand prize port 8 or the second grand prize port 9 is not open, a preset closing time has elapsed in step S340-11. Determine whether or not. As a result, if the closing time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process is terminated, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-4.

  In step S340-12, the main CPU 101a performs a reset process. Specifically, the special electricity operation number storage area is cleared and the counter value of the round winning counter is cleared.

  In step S340-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the value (round number (R)) stored in the round game number storage area is the number of round games executed in the jackpot game. When determining “Yes”, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S340-15, and when determining “No”, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S340-14.

  In step S340-14, the main CPU 101a adds "1" to the current round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area and stores the result.

  In step S340-15, the main CPU 101a performs jackpot game end processing. Specifically, the round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area is reset.

  In step S340-16, the main CPU 101a performs an ending process. Specifically, according to the special figure stop data, the type of jackpot is confirmed, and an ending designation command associated with the type of jackpot transmitted to the effect control board 102 is set in the effect transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 101a sets an ending time corresponding to the type of jackpot in the special game timer counter.

  In step S340-17, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S340-18 and passes the ending time. If it is determined that it is not, the jackpot game process is terminated as it is.

  In step S340-18, the main CPU 101a sets 5 in the special figure special electric processing data, and shifts the processing to the special game end process shown in FIG.

  The small hit game process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently open. If it is determined that it is currently opening, the process proceeds to step S350-2. If it is determined that it is not currently opening, the process proceeds to step S350-5.

  In step S350-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and when the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the opening time has not elapsed, the small hit game process is terminated, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S350-3.

  In step S350-3, the main CPU 101a performs a small hit game start process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a selects a big winning opening opening / closing control table corresponding to the type of the small hit based on the special figure stop data, and determines the big winning opening opening / closing control table for the small hit game.

  In step S350-4, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening opening process. In the big prize opening process, first, “1” is added to the value stored in the special operation number storage area (special operation number (K)) and stored. Then, the energization start data of the first big prize opening / closing solenoid 80B is set in order to open the first big prize opening 8, and the big prize opening opening / closing control table determined in the above step 350-3 is referred to. The opening time of the first big winning opening 8 based on the current special electric operation number (K) is set in the special game timer counter, and the small hit game is ended.

  In step S350-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently ending. The ending here means a period from the end of the opening of the last first big winning opening 8 to the end of the small hit game. Therefore, if the main CPU 101a determines that it is currently ending, it moves the process to step S350-13, and if it determines that it is not currently ending, it moves the process to step S350-6.

  In step S350-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first big prize opening 8 is being opened. If the main CPU 101a determines that the first grand prize opening 8 is not open, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S350-10, and if the main CPU 101a determines that the first big prize opening 8 is open, the step In S350-7, it is determined whether or not an “opening end condition” for ending the opening of the first big winning opening 8 is satisfied. As the “opening end condition”, the counter value (C) of the round winning counter has reached a specified number (for example, 9), or the opening time of one time of the first big winning opening 8 has passed (special game) Timer counter = 0) is adopted. If the main CPU 101a determines that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S350-8, and if it determines that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied, the main CPU 101a ends the small hit game process. To do.

  In step S350-8, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening closing process. In the big prize opening closing process, the energization stop data of the first big prize opening / closing solenoid 80B is set in order to close the first big prize opening 8, and the big prize opening opening / closing control table determined in the above step 350-3. Referring to, based on the current special electric operation number (K), the closing time of the first big prize winning opening 8 is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the first grand prize winning opening 8 is closed.

  In step S350-9, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the small hit game ending condition is satisfied. The small hit game ending condition is that the special electric operation number (K) is the number of times the first big winning opening 8 is preset or the counter value (C) of the round winning counter is a specified number (for example, nine) ). When the main CPU 101a determines that the small hit game end condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S350-11. When the main CPU 101a determines that the small hit game end condition is not satisfied, the main hit game process. Exit.

  In step S350-11, the main CPU 101a sets “0” in the special operation number storage area and sets “0” in the counter value (C) of the round winning counter as the small hit game ending process. That is, the special operation number storage area and the round winning counter are cleared.

  In step S350-12, the main CPU 101a sets an ending designation command according to the type of small hits in the effect transmission data storage area based on the special drawing stop data, and sets an ending time according to the type of small hits. Set to the special game timer counter.

  In step S350-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the closing time set in step S350-8 has elapsed. Note that the closing time is also determined by whether or not the special game timer counter = 0 as in the opening time. As a result, when the main CPU 101a determines that the closing time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101a ends the small hit game process, and when it determines that the closing time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S350-4. .

  In step S350-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If the main CPU 101a determines that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S350-14 and passes the ending time. If it is determined that the game is not done, the small hit game process is terminated.

  In step S350-14, the main CPU 101a sets “0” in the special figure special electricity processing data.

  The special game end process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S360-1, the main CPU 101a loads the gaming state data stored in the gaming state buffer.

  In step S360-2, the main CPU 101a confirms the game state when the special game determination relating to the special game is performed based on the game state data, and in step S360-3, the main CPU 101a stores the game state in the special figure stop data storage area. The special figure stop data is confirmed, and in step S360-4, ON / OFF of the specific area passing flag is confirmed.

  In step S360-5, the main CPU 101a collates the confirmed gaming state, special figure stop data, and ON / OFF of the specific area passing flag with the post-special gaming determination table, and determines the gaming state and specific period after the special gaming. Make a post-special game decision.

  In step S360-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not to set the high-probability gaming state based on the determination result of the special post-game determination. If so, the main CPU 101a stores it in the high-probability flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. A high probability flag (for example, “01H”) is turned ON, and the executable number (Xa) (100 times in this embodiment) is set in the high probability state remaining number counter. In step S350-4, the main CPU 101a turns off the high probability state designation flag.

  Further, in step S360-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not to set the short-time gaming state based on the determination result of the special post-game determination. If so, the main CPU 101a stores it in the short-time flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. The time reduction flag (for example, “01H”) is turned ON, and the executable number (Xa) (100 times in this embodiment) is set in the time reduction state remaining number counter.

  In step S360-7, the main CPU 101a confirms the current gaming condition state, and sets a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming condition state in the effect transmission data storage area.

  In step S360-8, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not to set the specific period based on the determination result of the special post-game determination, and if so, the period specifying flag indicating the specific period based on the determination result. Is set in the period specific flag storage area of the main RAM 101c, and the executable number (Ta) is set in the specific period remaining number counter.

  In step S360-9, the main CPU 101a performs a clear process for clearing the specific area passing flag storage area and the game buffer. In step S360-10, the special CPU special electric processing data is set to 0, and the special symbol shown in FIG. The process moves to the memory determination process.

  The ordinary power control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, the main CPU 101a loads the value of the ordinary power transmission processing data in step S401, refers to the branch address from the loaded ordinary power processing data loaded in step S402, and if the ordinary power transmission processing data = 0. A normal symbol memory determination process including a normal symbol determination whether or not the auxiliary game is executed (the second start port 7 is opened) based on the general symbol determination information acquired based on the winning to the winning gate 10 ( If the normal symbol display device 22 is fluctuating based on the normal symbol determination, the processing is shifted to the normal symbol variation process (step S420). If the ordinary figure electric power processing data = 2, the process moves to the ordinary symbol stopping process (step S430) when the ordinary symbol display device 22 is stopped. = If 3 controls the opening and closing of the second start hole 7 (actuating the second start hole control device 70) and moves the process to the auxiliary game process (step S440).

  The normal symbol memory determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S410-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined that the normal symbol is being displayed, the main CPU 101a ends the normal symbol storage determination process. If it is determined that there is not, the process proceeds to step S410-2.

  In step S410-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the universal figure holding number counter for counting the normal figure holding number is 1 or more. When the number of held general symbols (G) is “0”, the normal symbol variation display is not performed, so the normal symbol variation process is terminated.

  When the main CPU 101a determines in step S410-2 that the number of reserved symbols (G) is “1” or more, in step S410-3, the main CPU 101a determines from the counter value (G) of the normal symbol reservation number counter “G”. 1 "is subtracted and updated, and a new number of reserved general drawings (G) is set.

  In step S410-4, the main CPU 101a performs a shift process on the data stored in the normal symbol storage area. Specifically, each data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the storage unit with the previous number. At this time, the data stored in the previous storage unit is written into a predetermined processing area and is erased from the normal symbol holding storage area. Here, in order to change the display content of the normal symbol hold display device 25 in accordance with the shift of data (digestion of the hold), specifically, to display the current general symbol hold number (G), the normal symbol is displayed. The hold display data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S410-5, the main CPU 101a performs a hit determination, that is, a determination of a hit determination random number stored in the normal symbol holding storage area. Specifically, the main CPU 101a checks whether or not the hit determination random number for the normal symbol stored in the main ROM 101b is compared with the hit determination random number stored in the main ROM 101b after being shifted in step S410-4. Judgment is made. In the present embodiment, the winning determination table is associated with the start opening winning ease state (non-short-time gaming state / short-time gaming state) (see FIG. 14A), so the short-time flag storage area And a hit determination table for a normal symbol related to the current start port winning easiness state is selected.

  In step S410-6, the main CPU 101a performs normal symbol determination. Specifically, the main CPU 101a performs normal symbol determination by comparing the normal symbol determination random number stored in the 0th storage unit with the normal symbol determination random number stored in the main ROM 101b after being shifted in step S410-4. As described above, since this normal symbol determination table is associated with the result of the hit determination (win / loss), the result of the hit determination is confirmed, and the normal symbol determination table related to the result of the hit determination is determined. select.

  In step S410-7, the main CPU 101a determines a normal effect symbol designation command based on the result of the normal symbol determination, and sets the determined normal effect symbol designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. In step S410-8, the main CPU 101a determines the stop symbol data related to the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “general symbol stop symbol data”), that is, the type of the normal symbol, based on the result of the normal symbol determination. The normal stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  When the determined general symbol stop symbol data is determined as a general symbol variation pattern in the general symbol variation pattern determination, it is determined in the normal symbol stop processing in FIG. Is also used when determining the opening / closing mode of the second starting port 7.

  In step S410-9, the main CPU 101a performs general-purpose fluctuation pattern determination. Specifically, since the normal pattern variation pattern determination table for performing the universal map variation pattern determination is classified according to the start opening winning easiness state, the main CPU 101a first confirms the time-short flag storage area, A general-purpose variation pattern determination table according to the current start opening winning easiness state is selected. Then, the main CPU 101a compares the random number for determining the customary pattern fluctuation pattern in the 0th storage unit, which is shifted in the above step S410-4, with the selected customary pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, and determines the normal pattern fluctuation pattern (normal map). (Variation time).

  In step S410-10, the main CPU 101a sets a normal variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined normal variation pattern in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c. The normal pattern change pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and the effect control board 102 recognizes that the change display of the normal symbol starts by receiving this command, and can execute the roulette effect described later.

  In step S410-11, the main CPU 101a sets a base variation time corresponding to the determined general variation pattern in the auxiliary game timer counter. The auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S410-12, the main CPU 101a sets the normal symbol variation display data to perform the normal symbol variation display on the ordinary symbol display device 22, and if the hit determination result is a hit, the main CPU 101a determines in step S410-13. The normal game stop symbol data is collated with the auxiliary game reference data determination table to determine auxiliary game reference data and set in the auxiliary game reference data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S410-14, the main CPU 101a sets “1” in the normal-plot normal power processing data, and ends the normal symbol variation process. The normal symbol variation display data includes information such as the type of the normal symbol display device 22 to be operated, the variation display mode, and the variation time.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S420-1, the main CPU 101a terminates the normal symbol variation display, in other words, whether or not the normal diagram variation time set in step S410-10 has elapsed (auxiliary game timer counter). = 0))). As a result, when it is determined that the normal symbol variation display does not end, the normal symbol variation processing is terminated and the next subroutine is executed.

  In step S420-2, the main CPU 101a sets a normal effect symbol stop designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. In step S420-3, the main CPU 101a performs normal processing based on the normal symbol stop symbol data set in step S410-8. Data for stop display of general symbols for stopping display on the symbol display device 22 is set. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the normal symbol lottery. In step S420-4, the main CPU 101a sets a normal symbol stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) in the auxiliary game counter. The auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  Then, in step S420-5, the main CPU 101a sets 2 to the ordinary figure / electric power process data, and ends the normal symbol variation process.

  Next, the normal symbol stop process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S430-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the normal symbol stop display ends, in other words, whether or not the normal symbol stop time set in the auxiliary game timer counter in step S420-4 has elapsed. Whether or not (auxiliary game timer counter = 0?) Is determined. As a result, when it is determined that the normal symbol stop display does not end, the normal symbol stop processing ends, and the next subroutine is executed.

  If the main CPU 101a determines that the stop display of the normal symbol is finished, the main CPU 101a determines in step S430-2 whether the result of the hit determination related to the normal symbol stop process is “win”. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the general symbol stop symbol data stored in the normal symbol stop symbol data storage area is related to a normal symbol. Here, if it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, the process proceeds to step S430-4. If it is not determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, the process proceeds to step S430-3.

  In step S430-4, the main CPU 101a sets 3 to the ordinary power transmission processing data. Then, in step S430-5, the main CPU 101a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the usual figure stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c, and responds to the usual figure stop symbol based on the auxiliary game control table. Set the opening time in the auxiliary game timer counter. The auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110. When this process is finished, the normal symbol stop process is finished.

  In step S430-3, the main CPU 101a sets 0 to the ordinary figure ordinary electricity processing data, and ends the normal symbol suspension process.

  The auxiliary game process will be described with reference to FIG. The main CPU 101a first determines in step S440-1 whether or not it is currently opening. If it is determined that it is currently opening, the process proceeds to step S440-2. If it is determined that it is not currently opening, the process proceeds to step S440-5.

  In step S440-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter = 0, and when the auxiliary game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, when the opening time has not elapsed, the auxiliary game process is terminated, and when the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S440-3.

  In step S440-3, the main CPU 101a performs auxiliary game start processing. In the auxiliary game start process, the main CPU 101a first selects the second start port opening / closing control table based on the auxiliary game reference data stored in the auxiliary game reference data storage area of the main RAM 101c, and enters the predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. set.

  In step S440-4, the main CPU 101a performs a second start port opening process. In the second opening opening process, first, “1” is added to the value stored in the ordinary power operation number storage area (the ordinary power operation number (D)) and stored. And in order to operate 70 A of normal movable pieces, while setting the energization start data of the 2nd starting port opening / closing solenoid 70B, with reference to the 2nd starting port opening / closing control table set by said step S440-3, The opening time of the second start port 7 based on the general electric operation number (D) is set in the auxiliary game timer counter.

  In step S440-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently ending. Ending here refers to the period from the end of the last opening of the second start port 7 to the end of the auxiliary game. Therefore, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S440-12 when determining that it is currently ending, and shifts the process to step S440-6 when determining that it is not currently ending.

  In step S440-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second start port 7 is being opened. If the main CPU 101a determines that the second start port 7 is open, whether or not the “open end condition” for ending the opening of the second start port 7 is satisfied in step S440-7. Determine. As the “opening end condition”, the counter value of the starting opening prescribed winning counter has reached a prescribed (maximum) number (for example, 10), or that the opening time of one opening of the second starting opening 7 has elapsed ( Auxiliary game timer counter = 0) is adopted. Then, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S440-8 when it is determined that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, and ends the auxiliary game process when it is determined that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied. .

  In step S440-8, the main CPU 101a performs a second start port closing process. In the second start port closing process, energization stop data of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B is set to close the second start port 7, and the second start port opening / closing control table set in step S440-3 is set. The closing time of the second start port 7 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter on the basis of the current general electric operation number (D). As a result, the second start port 7 is closed.

  In step S440-9, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not an auxiliary game end condition is satisfied. The auxiliary game end condition is that the number of times the second start opening 7 is opened with a preset number of power transmission operation (D), or the counter value of the start opening prescribed winning counter is the maximum number (for example, 10). It has been reached. The main CPU 101a moves the process to step S440-10 when it is determined that the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied, and ends the auxiliary game process when it is determined that the auxiliary game end condition is not satisfied. .

  In step S440-10, the main CPU 101a performs an auxiliary game end process of setting “0” in the general electric operation number storage area and setting “0” in the second start opening prize regulation counter. That is, the general electric operation number storage area and the second start opening prescribed winning counter are cleared.

  In step S440-11, the main CPU 101a sets an ending designation command corresponding to the normal-design stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area, and at the same time, the ending time according to the standard-design stop symbol data based on the auxiliary game control table. Is set in the auxiliary game timer counter.

  When determining that the second start port 7 is not open in step S440-6, the main CPU 101a determines in step S440-13 whether or not the closing time set in step S440-8 has elapsed. To do. Note that the closing time is also determined by whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter = 0 as in the opening time. As a result, when determining that the closing time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101a ends the auxiliary game process, and when determining that the closing time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S440-4.

  In step S440-12, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If the main CPU 101a determines that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S440-14 and passes the ending time. If it is determined that it is not, the auxiliary game process is terminated.

  In step S440-14, the main CPU 101a sets the ordinary power transmission process data = 0, and ends the auxiliary game process.

(Main processing by production control board)
Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 102a in the effect control board 102 will be described.

  First, the main process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the sub CPU 102a, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 102a, and the sub CPU 102a performs the following main processing.

  First, in step S1001, the sub CPU 102a performs an initialization process. In this processing, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 102b, and the sub RAM 102c in which flags and commands are stored is initialized.

  In step S1002, the sub CPU 102a determines the random effect pattern determination random number, the appearance symbol pattern determination random number, the appearance order pattern determination random number, the first special notice effect execution determination random number, the connection location determination random number, and the pseudo continuous level determination. Random number, random number for count lock level determination, random number for special game effect pattern determination, random number for effect design stop display pattern determination, random number for special figure hold display final mode determination, random number for special figure hold display special mode transition pattern determination, special figure An effect comprising a random number for determining a hold display special mode, a random number for determining a special figure hold display special mode transition pattern, a random number for determining the execution of the second special notice effect, a random number for determining the serif pattern, a random number for determining the end of the effect mode E, and the like. Processing for updating the production random number used for control is performed.

  Note that a random number counter is provided in the sub-RAM 102c for each of various random numbers constituting the production random number. In the effect random number update process, “1” is added to the random number counter provided for each type of random number. A random number range is provided for various random numbers constituting the production random number. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value determined for the random number. Then, in the update of the random number, when the random value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, the random number counter is returned to “0” without adding “1”.

  Further, the maximum value of the random number range is set to be different depending on the type of random number (see FIGS. 61 to 72, FIGS. 74 to 81, FIGS. 83 to 85, and FIGS. 87 to 89). This is to prevent the random number counter related to the production random number from being completely synchronized and always having the same random number value. Since it is only necessary to prevent the random number counter related to the production random number from being completely synchronized, different initial value random numbers are provided to the various production random numbers instead of making the maximum values of the various random number ranges different, When updating the random number, if the random value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, each random value may be newly updated from the initial random number at that time.

(Timer interrupt processing by production control board)
The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 39 is executed by generating a clock pulse every predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the effect control board 102.

  First, in step S1100, the sub CPU 102a saves information stored in the register of the sub CPU 102a to the stack area.

  In step S1200, the sub CPU 102a controls each timer counter (variation effect timer counter, customer waiting effect timer counter, special game effect timer counter, normal operation effective start timer counter, specific operation effective) for performing time management related to various effects. A time control process for updating a start timer counter or the like is performed.

  In step S1300, the sub CPU 102a performs command analysis processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 102a performs processing for analyzing a command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 40 to 57.

  When the effect control board 102 receives the command transmitted from the main control board 101, the effect control board 102 performs a reception interrupt process of the effect control board 102 (not shown) and stores the received command in the reception buffer. Thereafter, processing for analyzing the received command is performed in step S1300.

  In step S1400, the sub CPU 102a performs a special figure holding effect control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a performs a special figure hold effect control process for controlling the special figure hold effect. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1500, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not an effect button detection signal has been output from the effect button detection switch 18a, and indicates or prompts the operation of the effect button 18A (hereinafter referred to as “effect button effect”). .) For effect button effect control processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1600, the sub CPU 102a performs a demonstration effect control process for controlling the demonstration effect performed in the customer waiting state.

  In step S1700, the sub CPU 102a performs data output processing for transmitting various effect control commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

  In step S1800, the sub CPU 102a restores the information saved in step S1100 to the register of the sub CPU 102a.

(Command analysis processing by production control board)
The command analysis process performed by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In step S1301, the sub CPU 102a newly receives a command and determines whether the command is stored in the reception buffer. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis processing. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command has been received, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1302.

  In step S1302, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a start slot winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a start opening prize designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1303 and step S1304, and if it determines that the command is not a starting opening prize designation command, moves the process to step S1305. .

  In step S1303, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the start opening prize designation command, confirms the type of the start opening related to the start opening prize designation command, and provides an effect information storage area (first area) provided for each type. The special figure holding effect counter (the first special figure holding effect counter and the second special figure holding effect) provided in the sub RAM 102c for each type of the start port, while being stored in the effect information storage area and the second effect information storage area) The counter value of the counter) is added, and the first look-ahead effect determination process based on the start opening prize designation command stored in the special figure hold effect storage area is performed in step S1304, and the command analysis process is performed. finish. The special figure hold number addition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, and the first prefetch effect process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1305, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect designating command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step S1306. If the sub CPU 102a determines that there is no effect symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step S1307.

  In step S1306, the sub CPU 102a constitutes a special symbol lottery effect, which is performed when the special symbol stop display is performed, and an effect for performing a stop display of the effect symbol suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery. A symbol stop display pattern determination process is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. More specifically, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the effect designating command, and based on the information included in the received effect designating command, the sub CPU 102a is predetermined in the effect design to be stopped and displayed on the image display device 14, that is, the effect design stop display. The arrangement (combination) of the decorative symbols arranged on the effective line is determined.

  In step S1307, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to step S1308 to step S1310. If the sub CPU 102a determines that there is no special figure variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step S1311. Move processing.

  In step S1308, the sub CPU 102a confirms the type of the start port related to the variation pattern designation command, performs a shift process on the data stored in the effect information storage area corresponding to the start port, and also sets the type of the start port. A hold number subtraction process is performed to subtract “1” from the counter value of the special figure hold effect counter provided for each. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1309, the sub CPU 102a configures the special drawing lottery effect, and the variable effect for determining the variable effect pattern of the variable effect (including the variable symbol display) that is performed when the special symbol variable display is performed. A pattern determination process is performed, and the command analysis process ends. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49.

  In step S1310, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect mode remaining number display process related to an effect mode remaining number display performed in an effect mode B and an effect mode C described later, and ends the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1311, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect symbol stop designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect symbol stop designation command, it moves the process to step S1312-step S1314, and if it determines that there is no effect symbol stop designation command, the process proceeds to step S1315. Move.

  In step S1312, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect symbol stop process in which a variation effect end command for stopping the variation display of the effect symbols that are variably displayed (to end the variation effect) is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1313, the sub CPU 102a performs a first effect mode setting process for setting the effect mode in response to the end of the special symbol variation display, and ends the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the effect mode is a classification mode (category) of variable effects performed by an effect device such as the image display device 14 in response to a special drawing lottery (or a special symbol variable display). , Associated with a gaming state or the like.

  In step S <b> 1314, the sub CPU 102 a performs second look-ahead effect determination processing based on the start opening prize designation command stored in the special figure hold effect storage area when the effect mode B, which is the high probability game state and the short-time game state, ends. To complete the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 52 to 53.

  In step S1315, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command, it moves the process to step S1316, and if it determines that there is no gaming state designation command, it moves the process to step S1317.

  In step S1316, the sub CPU 102a sets the data indicating the gaming state indicated by the received gaming state designation command in the gaming state storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the command analysis processing.

  In step S1317, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening designation command related to a special game. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special game opening designation command, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to step S1318 and step S1319. If the sub CPU 102a determines that there is no special game opening designation command, the process proceeds to step S1320. Move.

  In step S1318, the sub CPU 102a performs a special game effect pattern determination process for determining a special game effect pattern that is an aspect of the special game effect that is an effect related to the special game, and ends the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1319, the sub CPU 102a changes the display mode of a special figure hold image, which will be described later, to a normal mode in response to a special game, and performs a process for not displaying the special figure hold image during the special game. To complete the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1320, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command, it moves the process to step S1321, and if it determines that there is no round designation command, it moves the process to step S1322.

  In step S1321, the sub CPU 102a performs a round effect pattern determination process for determining a round effect pattern that is a mode of the round effect, and ends the command analysis process.

  In step S1322, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a big hit / medium specific area winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a big hit / medium specific area winning designation command, it moves the process to step S1323, and if it determines that the command is not a big hit / medium specific area winning designation command, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to step S1324. Move.

  In step S1323, the sub CPU 102a performs a specific area passing process as a process related to an effect based on the fact that the game ball has passed the specific area 12, and ends the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1324, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending designation command related to a special game (special game ending designation command). If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special game ending designation command, it moves the process to step S1325. If it determines that the command is not a special game ending designation command, it moves the process to step S1326.

  In step S1325, the sub CPU 102a performs an ending effect pattern determination process for determining an ending effect pattern which is an aspect of the ending effect and an effect mode set after the special game, and ends the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1326, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot specific area winning designation command. If the sub-CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a big hit special area winning designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1327, and if it determines that the command is not a big hit special area winning designation command, the sub CPU 102a performs the process in step S1328. Move.

  In step S1327, the sub CPU 102a sub-commands a big prize opening error production control command indicating the contents of the big prize opening error production which is an error notification when the game ball has passed the specific area 12 when the big hit game is not executed. The command is set in the transmission buffer of the RAM 102c, and the command analysis process is terminated.

  The set big prize opening error effect control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1700. The lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 execute the big prize opening error presentation by receiving the big prize opening error presentation control command.

  In step S1328, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command, it moves the process to step S1329. If it determines that the command is not a customer waiting state designation command, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis processing.

  In step S1329, the sub CPU 102a performs a demonstration effect standby process for setting a standby time for performing a so-called demonstration effect, and ends the command analysis process.

(Processing for adding special figure hold on production control board)
With reference to FIG. 42, the special figure holding number addition processing by the effect control board 102 will be described.

  In step S1303-1, the sub CPU 102a stores the start opening prize designation command in the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  As shown in FIG. 60A, the effect information storage area is provided for each type of start opening (first effect information storage area and second effect information storage area). The sub CPU 102a analyzes the received start opening winning designation command, confirms the type of the starting opening (the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7) related to the starting opening winning designation command, and sets the type of the starting opening. The corresponding production information storage area is stored.

Each effect information storage area has the same configuration as the special symbol reservation storage area of the main RAM 101c, and is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit for each type of the start ports 6 and 7. Further, each storage unit stores a start opening prize designation command storage area for storing a start opening prize designation command, and a special figure hold display for storing information (a special figure hold display form data) indicating a display form of a special figure hold image described later. Special data for storing a transition pattern when the display mode of the special figure reservation image determined in the first prefetch effect determination process described later is changed (special figure reservation display special aspect transition pattern data). Information indicating the transition pattern when the display mode of the special figure hold image determined in the figure preserving display special mode transition pattern data storage area and the second prefetch effect determination process described later is changed (the special figure hold display special mode) Special pattern hold display special mode transition pattern data storage area for storing transition pattern data) (see FIG. 60C).
It should be noted that the start opening winning designation command is stored in order from the storage unit having the smallest number in the storage unit in which the starting opening winning designation command is not stored.

In step S <b> 1303-2, the sub CPU 102 a displays data representing a normal mode, which is a normal display mode of an image (hereinafter, referred to as “special map hold image”) indicating a special figure hold related to the stored start opening prize designation command (hereinafter, “special drawing hold image”). For example, “00H”) is set in the special figure hold display normal mode data storage area.
The special figure reservation image is composed of a first special figure reservation image representing the first special figure reservation and a second special figure reservation image representing the second special figure reservation.

  In step S1303-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command is based on winning in the first start port 6. If it is determined that the command is based on a winning at the first start port 6, the process proceeds to step S1303-4, and the counter value of the first special figure holding effect counter provided in the sub RAM 102c is incremented by "1" and updated. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not based on a winning at the first start port 6, the process proceeds to step S1303-5, and the counter value of the second special figure holding effect counter provided in the sub RAM 102c is incremented by “1”. Update.

  In step S1303-6, the sub CPU 102a stores the special figure hold occurrence designation flag in the special figure hold occurrence designation flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the special figure hold number addition process.

(First look-ahead effect determination process of effect control board)
The first prefetch effect determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1304-1, the sub CPU 102a checks the current effect mode by referring to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In the present embodiment, the effect modes are roughly divided into effect mode A, effect mode B, effect mode C, effect mode D, and effect mode E.

  The production mode A is a normal production mode set in correspondence with the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state (normal period).

  The production mode B is most advantageous to the player set corresponding to the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state (first specific period) set based on the game ball passing through the specific area 12 in the jackpot game. This is an effect mode that indicates that the game state is different.

  The production mode C is set corresponding to a low-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state that are set based on the fact that the game ball does not pass through the specific area 12 in the jackpot game, and is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. This is an effect mode that represents a low-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state (second specific period), which is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state.

  The effect mode D is an effect mode that is set corresponding to the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state (third specific period) after the small hit game executed based on the special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state.

The production mode E is a low-probability gaming state and a non-short-time gaming state that are set based on the fact that the special figure variation display is executed 100 times without winning the jackpot in the production mode B set with the jackpot 3 as an opportunity. It is an effect mode set corresponding to (normal period).
It should be noted that the effect mode A, effect mode E, and effect mode D share the same low game state and non-short game state, but the background images displayed in the display area 140 are different. Specifically, the background image according to the effect mode D is different in that a specific character is displayed in a predetermined area in addition to the background images according to the effect mode A and the effect mode E.

  In step S1304-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode B. If it determines with effect mode B, a process will be moved to step S1304-3, and if it is determined that it is not effect mode B, a process will be moved to step S1304-18.

  In step S1304-18, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C. If it is determined that the production mode is C, the process proceeds to step S1304-7, and if it is not the production mode C, the process proceeds to step S1304-19.

  In step S1304-19, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special figure hold display mode data storage area, and in step S1304-20, whether or not the second prefetch effect is being performed, that is, the special figure hold display form data storage area. It is determined whether or not the hold display special mode data is set. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the second pre-reading effect is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S1304-21, and if it is determined that the second pre-reading effect is being performed, the first pre-reading effect determination process is terminated.

  In step S1304-21, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not there is any winning winning combination in the starting opening prize designation command stored in the first special symbol holding storage area before the starting opening prize designation command. . If it is determined that there is no jackpot winning in the start opening winning designation command stored in the first special symbol hold storage area, the process proceeds to step S1304-8, and if it is determined that there is a jackpot winning, The first prefetch effect determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in step S1304-3, the sub CPU 102a checks the counter value of the effect mode switching counter provided in the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1304-4, the sub CPU 102a checks the second special figure hold effect counter value provided in the sub RAM 102c, and checks the second special figure hold number.

  In step S1304-5, the sub CPU 102a reserves based on the counter value of the effect mode switching counter and the second special figure holding effect counter value confirmed in steps S1304-3 and S1304-4. Calculate the expected number of fluctuations of the second special figure hold.

  In step S1304-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the calculated number of fluctuations calculated in step S1304-5 is 101 times or more. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is 101 times or more, it moves the process to step S1304-22, and if it determines that it is not 101 times or more, it moves the process to step S1304-7.

  In step S <b> 1304-22, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether the command is based on winning in the first start port 6. If it is determined that the command is not based on a winning to the first starting port 6, the process proceeds to step S1304-23, and if it is determined that the command is based on a winning to the first starting port 6, the first prefetch effect determining process Exit.

  In step S1304-23, the sub CPU 102a sets the second prefetch effect suggestion mode data in the special figure hold display mode data storage area. This second look-ahead effect suggestion mode data is a display mode assigned with a character “?” Different from the normal hold display mode in the second special figure hold display area 143 of the display area 140 of the image display device 14. This is data for displaying the second special figure reserved image in the second prefetch effect suggestion mode, and indicates that the second special figure reserved image is the target of the second prefetch effect (see FIG. 122C). ).

  On the other hand, in step S1304-7, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command is based on winning in the first starting port 6. If it is determined that the command is not based on a winning to the first starting port 6, the process proceeds to step S1304-8, and if it is determined that the command is based on a winning to the first starting port 6, the first prefetch effect determining process Exit.

  In step S1304-8, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not there is any winning winning combination in the starting opening prize designation command stored in the second special symbol holding storage area before the starting opening prize designation command. . If it is determined that there is no jackpot winning in the start opening winning designation command stored in the second special symbol storage area, the process proceeds to step S1304-9, and if it is determined that there is a jackpot winning, The first prefetch effect determination process is terminated.

  In step S1304-9, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the start port winning designation command has reach. If it is determined that there is a reach, the process proceeds to step S1304-10. If it is determined that there is no reach, the first prefetch effect determination process ends.

In step S1304-10, the sub CPU 102a selects the special figure hold display final mode determination table. In step S1304-11, the sub CPU 102a selects the random number value indicated by the random number counter related to the special figure hold display final mode determination random number. get.
In step S1304-12, the acquired random number value and the start opening prize designation command are collated with the special figure hold display final form determination table to determine the final form of the special figure hold image.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the special figure hold display final mode determination table is associated with the start entry prize designation command, and the special figure hold indicating a plurality of random number determination values and the special figure hold display final mode. The final display mode data is stored in association with a predetermined probability.

This special figure hold display final mode is the special figure hold that is finally displayed between the occurrence of special figure hold (right to execute special symbol display) related to the display of the special figure hold image and the disappearance An image display mode. In addition, the type of special figure hold display final mode is a special mode that suggests that the expected level of jackpot is relatively low, and that which is displayed in white, which is a normal mode that is a normal standard in gaming machines Y 1 that is displayed in blue, 1 that is expected to have a higher jackpot expectation than Special Mode 1, and that that is displayed in red that is Special Mode 2 that suggests a higher jackpot expectation level than Special Mode 1 Special mode 3 which is displayed in purple, special mode 4 which is displayed in iridescent color which suggests that the jackpot winning is confirmed, and special mode 5 which indicates that the jackpot is winning or 2 There are six types of “pi” marked.
That is, the expected degree of jackpot in the normal mode and the special modes 1 to 4 increases in the order of white <blue <red <purple <rainbow color.
In addition, the special mode 5 is a ratio that is selected only in the case of winning the big win 2 or the small win, and by making the display mode of the common special figure holding image, the player can be set to either the big win 2 or the small win It ’s exciting to win.

  In step S1304-13, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the special figure hold display final mode determined in step S1304-12 is a special mode. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the special figure hold display final mode is the special mode, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1304-14. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the special figure hold display final mode is not the special mode, the sub CPU 102a ends the first prefetch effect determination process. To do.

In step S1304-14, the sub CPU 102a selects the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern determination table. In step S1304-15, the sub CPU 102a indicates the random number counter related to the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern determination random number. Get a random value.
In step S1304-16, the acquired random number value is checked against a special figure hold display special mode determination table, and a special figure hold display special mode transition pattern is determined.

  As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern determination table is associated with the start opening winning designation command, the special figure hold display final form data, and the special figure hold number, and includes a plurality of random numbers. The determination value and the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern data indicating the transition mode (scenario) up to the special figure hold display final mode are stored in association with each other with a predetermined probability.

  Special figure hold display special mode transition pattern is from the occurrence of special figure hold (right to execute special symbol display) related to special figure hold display to the final form of special figure hold display mode until it disappears It is a transition mode (scenario).

  In step S1304-17, the sub CPU 102a displays special figure hold display special mode transition pattern data indicating the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern determined in step S1304-16 as a special figure hold display special mode transition pattern data storage area. Set to.

(Determination design stop display pattern determination processing of the production control board)
The effect symbol stop display pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1306-1, the current effect mode is confirmed by referring to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and the effect symbol stop display associated with the current effect mode is displayed. Select the pattern determination table. This is because the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table for determining the effect symbol stop display pattern representing the combination (placement) of the decorative symbols on the predetermined effective line in the effect symbol stop display is divided according to the effect mode. (See FIGS. 65 and 66).

  In step S1306-2, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the effect symbol designation command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1306-3, the effect symbol stop display pattern determination associated with the effect symbol designation command is performed. A table is selected, and an effect symbol stop display pattern determination table used for effect symbol stop display pattern determination is determined. This is because each effect symbol stop display pattern determination table divided according to the effect mode is further divided according to the effect symbol designation command.

  In each effect symbol stop display pattern determination table, one or more effect symbol stop display patterns are stored in association with the effect symbol stop display pattern determination value, and the random number determination value ratios shown in FIGS. 65 and 66 are stored. Are appropriately allocated so that

  In step S1306-4, the sub CPU 102a obtains the random number value indicated by the random number counter related to the random number for determining the effect symbol stop display pattern, and in step S1306-5, the stored random number for determining the effect symbol stop display pattern is selected. The effect symbol stop display pattern is determined by collating with the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table to determine the effect symbol stop display pattern, and the effect symbol stop display pattern is determined.

  In step S1306-6, the sub CPU 102a sets an effect symbol stop display control command corresponding to the determined effect symbol stop display pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1306-7 corresponds to the effect symbol stop display pattern. The effect symbol stop display pattern data is set in the effect symbol stop display pattern data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  The effect symbol stop display control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. Then, when the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect symbol stop display control command, when the special symbol stop display is performed, the effect symbol stop display based on the effect symbol stop display pattern indicated by the command is performed. Is executed by the image display device 14.

  In step S1306-8, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the determined effect symbol stop display pattern is a jackpot winning symbol (a jackpot effect symbol). If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is a jackpot effect symbol, it moves the process to step S1306-9. If it determines that it is not a jackpot effect symbol, the sub CPU 102a ends the effect symbol stop display pattern determination process.

  In step S1306-9, the sub CPU 102a stores the jackpot effect symbol data associated with the jackpot effect symbol in the jackpot effect symbol data storage area provided in the sub RAM 102c, and ends the effect symbol stop display pattern determination process. To do.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, the jackpot effect symbol data is associated with a special symbol lottery result (special symbol determination result). Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), a total of 50 jackpot effect symbol data storage areas, that is, a storage unit 1 to a storage unit 50, are provided. The jackpot effect design data is stored in order from the smallest number in this storage unit. Although details will be described later, the jackpot effect symbol data storage area is cleared when the variation effect is performed a predetermined specified number of times (the number of times the effect mode can be executed) in the effect mode B or the effect mode C. That is, during the so-called consecutive resort, the jackpot effect design data is retained without being cleared.

(Special drawing hold number subtraction process for production control board)
The special figure reservation number subtraction process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S <b> 1308-1, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether the command is based on winning in the first start port 6. If it is determined that the command is based on a winning at the first start port 6, the process proceeds to step S1308-2, and the counter value of the first special figure holding effect counter provided in the sub RAM 102c is decremented by “1” and updated. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not based on a winning at the first start port 6, the process proceeds to step S1308-3, and the counter value of the second special figure holding effect counter provided in the sub RAM 102c is decremented by “1”. Update.

  In step S1308-4, the sub CPU 102a stores the special figure hold erasure designation flag in the special figure hold extinction designation flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1308-5, the sub CPU 102a performs a shift process on the data stored in the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and stores each data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit one previous storage unit. Shift to. For example, data stored in the fourth storage unit of the first effect information storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first effect information storage area. In addition, the data stored in the first storage unit of the first effect information storage area is shifted to the effect information storage area (the 0th storage unit) common to the first effect information storage area and the second effect information storage area. Then, the data stored in the 0th storage unit is deleted. Thereby, the data used in the previous game (variation effect) is deleted.

(Change control pattern determination processing of effect control board)
The variation effect pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In step S1309-1, the current effect mode is confirmed by referring to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the current effect mode. Select. This is because the variation effect pattern determination table for determining the variation effect pattern representing the effect contents of the variation effect is divided according to the effect mode. In step S1309-1, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect mode flag in the effect mode buffer of the sub RAM 102c. This is because the effect mode when the change effect is started is stored.

  In step S1309-2, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and uses the fluctuation effect pattern determination table associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command. select. This is because the variation effect pattern determination table divided by the effect mode is further divided by a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command (special figure fluctuation pattern).

  In the present embodiment, in each variation effect pattern determination table, one or more variation effect patterns are stored in association with the variation effect pattern determination value, and the random number determination values shown in FIGS. It is allocated appropriately so that it becomes a ratio. The variation effect pattern is identification information indicating the effect contents of the variation effect, and is determined by the image display device 14, the sound output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, the effect accessory device 17, and the effect button device 18. A specific effect mode of the change effect to be performed is associated.

  Fluctuation effect components such as change effect time, presence / absence of reach effect, contents of reach effect, presence / absence of effect button effect, content of effect button effect, effect deployment structure, etc. It is attached. Note that the variation effect pattern of the variation effect in the image display device 14 includes the display mode of the variation display of the effect symbol, the object image composed of characters and the like, the display mode related to the background image, and the like. Are associated with each other.

  In step S1309-3, the sub CPU 102a stores the random value indicated by the random number counter related to the random effect pattern determination random number in the random effect pattern determination random number storage area of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1309-4, the stored variable effect is stored. The random effect for pattern determination is collated with the selected variation effect pattern determination table to determine the variation effect pattern, and the variation effect pattern is determined.

  In step S1309-5, the sub CPU 102a sets a variable effect control command corresponding to the variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1309-6, the variable effect data corresponding to the variable effect pattern is stored in the sub RAM 102c. In step S1309-7, the variable effect time that is the effect time of the variable effect is set in the variable effect timer counter of the sub RAM 102c.

  The variation effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the fluctuation effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 cause the effect display device such as the image display device 14 to execute the change effect based on the change effect pattern indicated by the command.

  The variation effect timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S1200. The sub CPU 102a can specify the remaining time of the variation effect, in other words, the time elapsed since the variation effect was started, by the variation effect timer counter.

  In step S1309-8, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c to determine whether the effect mode A, effect mode D, or effect mode E is present. To do. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is the effect mode A, effect mode D or effect mode E, it moves the process to step S1309-9, and if it determines that it is not the effect mode A, effect mode D or effect mode E, it moves to step S1309-10. Move processing.

  In step S1309-9, the sub CPU 102a performs a specific chance effect determination process regarding a specific chance effect that can appear in the effect mode A, the effect mode D, or the effect mode E in the present embodiment.

  The specific chance effect is a kind of notice effect (the rush effect for determining whether or not to enter the jackpot expectation effect) after which the execution of the jackpot expectation effect is expected. In the specific chance effect, a special effect symbol appears in any or all of the left area, the central area, and the right area of the display area 140 and is displayed in a variable manner. When the special effect symbols are variably displayed in all of the left region, the center region, and the right region of the display area 140, the special effect symbols are temporarily stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (a), a plurality of special effect symbols are provided, and the special effect symbols indicate the type of jackpot expectation effect or the failure to execute the jackpot expectation effect.

  When the special effect design is temporarily stopped, the roulette effect (selection effect) indicating which special effect design is selected and which special effect design is determined for a plurality of temporarily stopped special effect designs. ) Is performed. Here, when one special effect symbol is selected and confirmed, the jackpot expectation effect (corresponding to the special effect symbol) suggested by the selected and confirmed special effect symbol is executed. In this way, when the specific chance effect is executed, it can be expected that the jackpot expectation effect will be executed thereafter.

  In the specific chance effect, the special effect design appears and fluctuates in any of the left area, the center area, and the right area, but ends before it appears and fluctuates in all areas. Sometimes. If the process ends in the middle, a stop display of an effect design suggesting a loss will be performed shortly thereafter.

  Here, the specific chance effect determination process will be described with reference to FIG. In the specific chance effect determination process, whether to execute the specific chance effect and the content of the specific chance effect when it is executed are determined.

  In step S1309-9-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the variable effect data set in step S1309-6. In step S1309-9-2, whether or not the specific chance effect is executed in the variable effect to be executed in the future. Determine whether. The specific chance effect is executed with the variation effect by the variation effect pattern that is “◯” in the column of the specific chance effect in the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 67 to 68 and FIGS. If it is determined that the specific chance effect is to be executed, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1309-9-3, and if it is determined that the specific chance effect is not to be executed, the specific chance effect determination process is terminated.

  In step S1309-9-3, the sub CPU 102a selects a specific chance effect determination table corresponding to the variable effect pattern confirmed in step S1309-9-1. The specific chance effect determination table includes an appearance symbol pattern determination table and an appearance order pattern determination table.

  In the appearance symbol pattern determination table, the determination value of the first specific chance effect pattern determination random number for determining the specific chance effect pattern, the appearance combination pattern, and the selection confirmation symbol are stored in association with each other. The random number determination value ratio shown in FIG. 75 is appropriately allocated.

  The appearance combination pattern is a combination of special effect symbols that can appear in the specific chance effect. The appearance “possible” is because although the specific chance effect has been executed, the special effect symbol may end without appearing in all of the left region, the center region, and the right region. As shown in FIG. 73 (b), in the appearance combination pattern, the types of special effect designs that can appear and the region (left region, center region, or right region) on the display region 140 where each symbol appears are also included. It is associated.

  The selection confirmation symbol is a special effect symbol that is finally selected and confirmed in the roulette effect, in other words, an area on the display area 140 where the roulette stops in the roulette effect (left area, center area, or right area). ).

  On the other hand, in the appearance order pattern determination table, the determination value of the second specific chance effect pattern determination random number for determining the specific chance effect pattern, the number of appearances, and the appearance order pattern are stored in association with each other. The random number determination value ratio shown in 76 is appropriately allocated.

  The number of appearances is the number of special effect symbols that appear in the specific chance effect. The appearance number “1” indicates that one special effect design appears in one of the left region, the center region, and the right region. The appearance number “2” indicates that one special effect symbol appears in each of the two areas of the left area, the center area, and the right area. The appearance number “3” indicates that one special effect symbol appears in each of the left region, the center region, and the right region.

  The appearance order pattern is a pattern in the order of the area (left area, center area, or right area) on the display area 140 where the special effect symbol appears in the specific chance effect. In the present embodiment, when special effect symbols appear, they appear one by one from the left region, the center region, or the right region. And as shown in FIG.73 (c), the appearance order pattern respond | corresponds to the permutation of a left side area | region, a center area | region, and a right side area | region.

  In step S1309-9-4, the sub CPU 102a acquires the random value indicated by the random number counter related to the first specific chance effect pattern determination random number, and in step S1309-9-5, the acquired random number value is determined as an appearance symbol pattern determination. The appearance symbol pattern determination for determining the appearance combination pattern and the selection confirmed symbol is performed by collating with the table.

  In step S1309-9-6, the sub CPU 102a acquires the random value indicated by the random number counter related to the second specific chance effect pattern determination random number, and in step S1309-9-7, the acquired random value is determined as the appearance order pattern. The appearance order pattern determination for determining the number of appearances and the appearance order pattern is performed by collating with the table.

  In step S1309-9-8, the sub CPU 102a sub-commands a specific chance effect control command corresponding to the content of the specific chance effect specified by the combination of the determination result of the appearance symbol pattern determination and the determination result of the appearance order pattern determination. It sets in the transmission buffer of RAM102c, complete | finishes the said specific chance production | presentation determination process, and returns a process to the variation production pattern determination process.

  The specific chance effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the specific chance effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 cause the image display device 14 and the effect lighting device 16 to execute the specific chance effect of the effect content indicated by the command. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the specific chance effect, the time in the variation effect where the special effect symbol appears is set uniformly regardless of the results of the variation effect pattern, the appearance symbol pattern determination, and the appearance order pattern determination. (For example, the first one is t1 seconds from the start of fluctuation, the second is t2 seconds from the start of fluctuation, and the third is t3 seconds from the start of fluctuation). Also, the time until the temporary stop of the special effect design is executed, the time when the roulette effect is started, and the time when the roulette effect is finished depend on the results of the variable effect pattern, the appearance symbol pattern determination, and the appearance order pattern determination. Although it is set uniformly, it can be set appropriately for each variation effect pattern.

  Thus, the specific chance effect pattern which is the content of the specific chance effect is determined by the combination of the appearance symbol pattern, the selection confirmation symbol, the appearance number, and the appearance order pattern. The method of determining the specific chance effect pattern is not limited to the present embodiment. For example, one or more specific chance effect patterns are set for each variable effect pattern, and the specific chance effect pattern is determined by lottery using a predetermined random number. For each specific chance effect pattern, the appearance symbol pattern, the selection confirmation symbol, the combination of the number of appearances and the appearance order pattern, the appearance time of the special effect symbol, the time when the special effect symbol is temporarily stopped, etc. It is also possible to variously associate the components of the specific chance effect (time when each event in the chance effect is executed). In addition to the patterns that appear one by one as in the present embodiment, as a mode in which special effects symbols appear, a pattern in which two special effects symbols appear simultaneously or a pattern in which three special effects symbols appear simultaneously, Alternatively, in a predetermined area (left area, center area, or right area), it is possible to set a pattern that appears multiple times while the same or different special effect symbols are switched.

  In step S1309-10, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode B. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is the effect mode B, it moves the process to step S1309-11, and if it determines that it is not the effect mode B, it moves the process to step S1309-12.

  In step S1309-11, the sub CPU 102a performs a first special notice effect determination process regarding the first special notice effect that can appear in the effect mode B in the present embodiment.

  The first special notice effect is a count lock effect indicating that the effect mode remaining number indicated by the effect mode remaining number display is not updated (locked), and after the effect display that is variably displayed is temporarily stopped. An effect in which a fluctuating re-variable effect is performed multiple times (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo-continuous effect”), an effect that has a high expectation of winning the jackpot after the pseudo-ream effect, or an effect in which the winning of the jackpot is confirmed (hereinafter referred to as “ Rush production, which is a production for developing into a “high expectation production”. In some cases, the rush effect is executed after the pseudo-continuous effect, and when the rush effect is executed after the pseudo-continuous effect, the high expectation effect is executed in the variable effect, If the rush effect is not executed later, the high expectation effect is not executed in the variation effect. Therefore, the first special notice effect is an effect that gives an expectation for the execution of the high expectation effect (implying the execution of the high expectation effect), and the pseudo-continuous effect and the count lock effect are the execution of the rush effect. It is a production that has expectations (indicating the execution of the rush production).

  Stages (levels) are associated with the pseudo-continuous effects and the count lock effects, and the contents of the effects develop according to the stages. As the levels of the pseudo-continuous effect and the count lock effect increase, the degree of expectation for the rush effect increases. In the following, the level of pseudo-continuous production is referred to as “pseudo-continuous level”, and the level of count lock production is referred to as “count level”.

  In step S1309-11-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special figure variation pattern related to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation effect data stored in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1309-11-2. The first special notice effect execution determination table is selected based on the special figure variation pattern. This is because the first special notice effect execution determination table is divided by the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command (special figure fluctuation pattern) associated with the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the fluctuation effect data.

  In the present embodiment, in each first special notice effect execution determination table, whether or not the first special notice effect execution is possible is stored in association with the determination value of the first special notice effect execution determination random number. The random number determination value ratio shown in FIG. 77 is appropriately allocated. In FIG. 77, “◯” in the column of whether or not to execute the first special notice effect indicates the determination result “execute the first special notice effect”, and “×” indicates that “the first special notice effect is executed”. The determination result “No” is shown.

  In step S1309-11-3, the sub CPU 102a acquires the random value indicated by the random number counter related to the first special notice effect execution determination random number, and in step S1309-11-4, the acquired first special notice effect execution determination is performed. The first special notice effect execution determination for determining whether to execute the first special notice effect is performed by comparing the random number for use with the selected first special notice effect execution determination table.

  In step S1309-11-5, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the result of the first special notice effect execution determination is “execute the first special notice effect”. The sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1309-11-6 if “executes the first special notice effect”, and performs the first special notice effect determination process if not “executes the first special notice effect”. The process ends, and the process returns to the variation effect pattern determination process.

  Here, the pseudo continuous effect related to the first special notice effect performed in the effect mode B will be described. This pseudo-continuous effect is executed up to the connection location set in advance in the variable effect. The connection location is associated with an event on the effect of the variation effect. Although this event on the performance is set as appropriate, in this embodiment, the appearance of the enemy character that is the introduction part of the confrontation effect, the scene of selecting the attack technique of the friendly character on the enemy character, various effects There are various settings such as a title display, a determined effect, a jackpot and a special game effect title display that is performed before the stop display of the effect symbol, an effect symbol stop display in the case of a loss. Details of the connection location will be described later.

  And the event on the production | presentation which concerns on a connection location is matched with the special figure fluctuation pattern (or fluctuation production pattern). Therefore, in step S1309-11-6, the sub CPU 102a selects the connection location determination table based on the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation effect data confirmed in step S1309-11-1. This is because the connection location determination table is divided by a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command (special figure fluctuation pattern) associated with the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the fluctuation effect data.

  In the present embodiment, in each connection location determination table, one or a plurality of connection locations are stored in association with the determination value of the connection location determination random number, and the random number determination value shown in FIG. It is allocated appropriately so that it becomes a ratio.

  In step S1309-11-7, the sub CPU 102a acquires the random value indicated by the random number counter related to the connection location determination random number. In step S1309-11-8, the sub CPU 102a uses the acquired connection location determination random number as the selected connection location. A connection location determination is performed in which a connection location is determined by checking the determination table.

  Here, the pseudo continuous level will be described. When the pseudo-ream effect related to the first special notice effect is executed, the pseudo-ream level may increase (step up), and if it increases, the content of the pseudo-ream effect will develop as the pseudo-ream level increases. To do. The finally reached pseudo-continuous level becomes the pseudo-continuous level for the pseudo-continuous effect. As the pseudo-ream level increases, the degree of expectation for executing the rush effect increases. In the present embodiment, the pseudo continuous level is set to “5” in total. The level increases in the order of pseudo-ream level 1 to pseudo-ream level 5. Moreover, when the pseudo-continuous level develops to the highest level of the pseudo-continuous level 5, the execution of the rush effect is confirmed.

  In step S1309-11-9, the sub CPU 102a selects a pseudo continuous level determination table for determining the pseudo continuous level. The pseudo continuous level determination is stored in the sub ROM 102b, and is divided by a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command (special figure fluctuation pattern). Therefore, the sub CPU 102a selects the pseudo-continuous level determination table associated with the special figure variation pattern related to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation effect data confirmed in step S1309-11-1.

  In step S1309-11-10, the sub CPU 102a acquires the random value indicated by the random number counter related to the pseudo-continuous level determination random number, and in step S1309-11-11 selects the acquired pseudo-continuous level determination random number. Pseudo continuous level determination is performed in which a pseudo continuous level is determined by checking the pseudo continuous level determination table.

  Here, the lock level will be described. When the count lock effect related to the first special notice effect is executed, the lock level may increase (step up), and if it increases, the content of the count lock effect develops according to the increase of the lock level. The finally reached lock level is the lock level for the count lock effect.

  As will be described in detail later, the count lock effect locks (restrains) the display of the remaining number of effects mode and updates the remaining number of effects mode, in other words, subtracts “1” from the remaining number of effects mode. It is a production that tries to regulate and prevent. The fact that the remaining number of effects mode is “1” means that the variable effect is executed once.

  The lock level corresponds to the degree of restriction, and as the lock level becomes higher, the degree of restriction becomes higher, meaning that the remaining number of effects mode is difficult to update. It means that execution is easy to continue. As the number of executions of the pseudo-ream in the first special notice effect of one time increases, the pseudo-ream level tends to increase. Therefore, as the count lock level increases, the inrush effect is executed and the expectation of winning a big hit can be expected. You can also. In the present embodiment, the lock levels are set in “3” stages in total. The level increases in the order of lock level 1 to lock level 3.

  In step S1309-11-12, the sub CPU 102a selects a lock level determination table for determining the lock level. The lock level determination is stored in the sub ROM 102b and is divided by a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command (special figure fluctuation pattern). Therefore, the sub CPU 102a selects the lock level determination table associated with the special figure variation pattern related to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation effect data confirmed in step S1309-11-1.

  In step S1309-11-13, the sub CPU 102a acquires the random number value indicated by the random number counter related to the lock level determination random number. In step S1309-11-14, the sub CPU 102a uses the acquired lock level determination random number as the selected lock level. The lock level is determined by checking the determination table to determine the lock.

  Next, in step S1309-11-15, the sub CPU 102a, based on the special figure variation pattern associated with the variation effect pattern, and the determination result of the connection location determination, the pseudo continuous level determination, and the lock level determination. Then, a first special notice effect scenario showing the contents of the first special notice effect is determined, and in step S1309-11-16, a first special notice effect control command representing the determined first special notice effect scenario is stored in the sub-RAM 102c. The transmission buffer is set, and the first special notice effect determination process ends. A method for determining the first special notice effect scenario will be described later.

  The first special notice effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the first special notice effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 produce the first special notice effect based on the first special notice effect scenario indicated by the command as an effect device such as the image display device 14. To run.

  In this embodiment, the first special notice effect control command and the change effect control command are separately transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in order to execute the change effect. The variation effect pattern shown and the first special notice effect scenario indicated by the first special notice effect control command are combined (combined), and one effect content in which the variable effect and the first special notice effect are combined (combined) is shown. An effect control command is transmitted, and the effect control of the effect can be performed on the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 based on the command.

  In step S1309-12, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode E. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is the production mode E, it moves the process to step S1313-3, and if it determines that it is not the production mode E, it moves the process to step S1313-14.

  In step S1309-13, the sub CPU 102a performs a second special notice effect determination process related to the second special notice effect that can appear in the effect mode E in the present embodiment.

  The second special notice effect is a kind of notice effect indicating the degree of expectation of jackpot of the variation effect. In the second special notice effect, an image G54 of a specific character is displayed in the display area 140, an image G64 instructing (or prompting) the operation of the effect button 18A, the operation effective period, and the remaining time of the operation effective period. The image G65 to be displayed is displayed, and then the dialogue image G60 of the specific character is displayed by pressing the effect button 18A.

  Further, a plurality of lines of specific characters are provided, and the jackpot expectation degree of the variation effect varies depending on the contents of the lines. (See Fig. 81)

  Here, the second special notice effect determination process will be described with reference to FIG. In the second special notice effect determination process, whether or not the second special notice effect is executed and the contents of the second special notice effect when executed are determined.

  In step S1309-13-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special figure variation pattern related to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation effect data stored in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1309-13-2. The second special notice effect execution determination table is selected based on the special figure variation pattern. This is because the second special notice effect execution determination table is divided by a special figure change pattern designation command (special figure change pattern) associated with the change effect pattern indicated by the change effect data.

  In the present embodiment, in each second special notice effect execution determination table, whether or not the second special notice effect execution can be executed is stored in association with the determination value of the second special notice effect execution determination random number. The random number determination value ratio shown in FIG. 80 is appropriately allocated. In FIG. 80, “◯” in the column of whether or not to execute the second special notice effect indicates the determination result “execute the second special notice effect”, and “×” indicates that “the second special notice effect is executed”. The determination result “No” is shown.

  In step S1309-13-3, the sub CPU 102a acquires the random value indicated by the random number counter related to the second special notice effect execution determination random number. In step S1309-13-4, the sub CPU 102a uses the obtained random number value as the second special notice. The performance execution determination table is collated, and in step S1309-13-5, it is determined whether execution is possible. If it is determined that the second special notice effect is to be executed, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1309-13-6, and if it is determined not to be executed, the second special notice effect is ended.

In step S1309-13-6, the sub CPU 102a selects a serif pattern determination table corresponding to the varying effect pattern confirmed in step S1309-13-1, and in step S1309-13-7, the sub CPU 102a sets the serif pattern determination random number. The random number value indicated by the random number counter is acquired.
In step S1309-13-8, the acquired random number value is checked against a serif pattern determination table, and serif pattern determination for determining a serif pattern is performed.

  The serif pattern determination table stores a determination value of serif pattern determination random numbers for determining a serif pattern of the second special notice effect, serif pattern data, and serif contents in association with the variable effect pattern. The random number determination value ratio shown in 81 is appropriately allocated.

There are three types of serif patterns: “...”, “chance”, and “hot”.
The expectation level for jackpots varies depending on the content of the lines, and the higher the order of "..."<"chance"<"hot".

  In step S1309-13-9, the sub CPU 102a turns on the effect button specific effect flag in the effect button specific effect flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1309-13-10, the sub CPU 102a sets the specific operation effective start time in the specific operation effective start timer counter.
The specific operation effective start time is the time from the start of the change effect to the time when the operation of the effect button 18A in the second special notice effect is enabled in the change effect in which the second special notice effect is executed. It is.

  In step S1309-13-11, the sub CPU 102a sets a second special notice effect control command corresponding to the contents (line contents) of the second special notice effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and the second special notice effect. The determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect pattern determination process.

  The second special notice effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the second special notice effect control command, the image display device 14, the effect lighting device 16 and the like produce the second special notice effect of the effect content indicated by the command. Let the device run.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the second special notice effect, the time in the changing effect in which the specific character image G54 appears is uniform regardless of the results of the changing effect pattern, the appearance symbol pattern determination, and the appearance order pattern determination. It is set (for example, the appearance of the specific character image G54 is 1 second from the start of fluctuation). Further, the time at which the effect instructing (or prompting) the operation of the effect button 18A is started and the time at which the effect instructing (or prompting) the operation of the effect button 18A is finished are also the result of the determination of the variable effect pattern and the serif pattern However, it can be set appropriately for each variation effect pattern.

  In step S1309-14, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation effect data set in step S1309-6 satisfies a predetermined effect condition set in advance. In the present embodiment, the predetermined effect condition is set such that the teammate character wins in the confrontation effect in the effect mode B (hereinafter referred to as “specific confrontation effect”). If the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1309-15. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1309-16.

  In step S1309-15, the sub CPU 102a adds “1” to the counter value of the effect condition satisfaction number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c and updates it.

  The effect condition satisfaction number counter is cleared when the effect mode A is set after the predetermined effect (the number of times the effect mode can be executed) is executed as the fluctuating effect in the effect mode B or the effect mode C, as will be described later. In other words, as long as the so-called consecutive resort continues, the number of times of winning in the specific confrontation effect that satisfies the effect condition is accumulated.

  In step S1309-16, the sub CPU 102a operates the effect button 18A other than the second special notice effect in the change effect to be executed based on the change effect data stored in the change effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c. It is determined whether or not an effect button effect (hereinafter referred to as “effect button normal effect”) is executed. Although not shown, the fluctuation effect data (variation effect pattern) is associated with presence / absence of the effect button normal effect. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect button normal effect is execution, it moves the process to step S1309-17, and if it determines that the effect button normal effect is not execution, ends the variation effect pattern determination process.

In step S1309-17, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect button normal effect preparation process for starting the effect button normal effect. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a adds “1” to the effect button normal effect number counter of the sub RAM 102c. The effect button normal effect counter is for counting up the number of times that the effect button normal effect is performed in the variation effect.
Further, the sub CPU 102a sets the normal operation effective start time in the normal operation effective start timer counter based on the effect button normal effect control table for controlling the effect button normal effect. The normal operation effective start time is the effective operation of the effect button 18A excluding the operation of the effect button 18A related to the second special notice effect after the change effect is started in the change effect that executes the effect button normal effect. It is time to become.

As shown in FIG. 82, the effect button normal effect control table is provided for each variable effect data (variable effect pattern), and is stored in the sub ROM 102b. In each effect button normal effect control table, a period during which the operation of the effect button 18A is valid (operation valid time) according to the number of times that the effect button normal effect in the variable effect is performed, until the first operation effective time is started. The time (operation effective start time) until the start of the time or the current operation effective time is set. Here, the normal operation effective start time and the operation effective time are associated with the number of effect button normal effects in the variable effect.
The operation valid time is a time during which the effect button 18A in the effect button effect can be operated.

  Therefore, the sub CPU 102a collates the effect button normal effect control table with the change effect data stored in the change effect data storage area and the effect button normal effect number stored in the effect button normal effect number counter, and performs the normal operation. The effective start time is determined and set in the normal operation effective start timer counter. Note that the normal operation effective start timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S1200.

(Processing mode remaining number display process of effect control board)
The effect mode remaining number display process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1310-1, the sub CPU 102a checks the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1310-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the effect mode B or the effect mode C is present. judge. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is the effect mode B or the effect mode C, it moves the process to step S1310-3, and if it determines that it is neither the effect mode B or the effect mode C, it ends the effect mode remaining number display process.

  In step S1310-3, the sub CPU 102a sets an effect mode remaining number display update command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the effect mode remaining number display process.

  For the effect mode B, the effect mode C, and the effect mode D, the number of fluctuating effects (or display or special symbol determination) that can be executed by the effect mode is set (hereinafter, this preset number of times is referred to as the effect number B). This is called “the number of times that the production mode can be executed”). When the production mode B, the production mode C, and the production mode D are set, the fluctuation production (or special drawing) that can be executed in the production mode with the execution of the fluctuation production (or special figure fluctuation display or special symbol determination). The number of times of variation display or special symbol determination, that is, the remaining number of variation effects (or special symbol variation display or special symbol determination) in the effect mode (hereinafter referred to as “number of remaining effects mode (M)”) is “1”. It decreases gradually. In effect mode B and effect mode C, effect mode remaining count image G73 representing the remaining number of effect modes (M) is displayed in a predetermined area (third area) 140C of display area 140 of image display device 14 (FIG. 99). Therefore, the effect mode remaining number (M) represented by the effect mode remaining number of times image G73 is updated with the start of the change effect (or special figure change display or special symbol determination) based on the reception of the special figure change pattern designation command. Accordingly, the effect mode remaining number display update command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c.

  The effect mode remaining number display update command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When receiving the effect mode remaining number display update command, the image control board 105 subtracts “1” from the displayed effect mode remaining number (M). As will be described later, the number of execution mode executions (Ma) in the production mode B and the production mode C is set to “100”. Then, when the jackpot game related to the effect mode B and the effect mode C ends, the effect mode remaining number image G73 representing the effect mode remaining number (M) = “100” is displayed. After the jackpot game is over, the number of times of variation effect (or special symbol variation display or special symbol determination), that is, whenever the variation effect (or special symbol variation display or special symbol determination) in the effect mode is started, Effect mode remaining number of times The effect mode remaining number (M) represented by the image G73 is subtracted by “1”. Specifically, after the end of the jackpot game, when the first (first) fluctuating effect is started, the rendition mode remaining number (M) represented by the rendition mode remaining number of times image G73 becomes “99” and the second fluctuation The effect mode remaining number (M) represented by the effect mode remaining number of times image G73 when the effect is started is “98”, and the effect mode remaining number of times image G73 represents when the 99th variation effect is started. Remaining effect mode number (M) represented by the effect mode remaining number image G73 when the remaining effect mode number (M) is "1" and the 100th (effect mode executable number (Ma) time) variable effect is started. Becomes “Last”.

(First effect mode setting process of effect control board)
Next, the first effect mode setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1313-1, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the effect symbol designation command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and determines in step S1313-2 whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. To do. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is lost, it moves the process to step S1313-3, and if it determines that it is not lost, it moves the process to step S1313-3.

  In step S1313-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to step S1313-20, and if it determines that it is not a big hit, it moves the process to step S1313-21.

  In step S1313-20, the sub CPU 102a sets the after-effect mode determination flag in the after-effect mode determination flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the first effect mode setting process. The setting of the after-effect mode determination flag indicates that the effect mode is set at the time of jackpot game ending. This is because the subsequent game state is determined depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 12 in the jackpot game, and the effect mode is determined based on the game state, so it cannot be determined at this time.

  In step S1313-21, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current presentation mode A or the presentation mode E is present, that is, whether or not a small win is won in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is the effect mode A or the effect mode E, it moves to step S1313-22, and if it determines that it is not the effect mode A or the effect mode E, it ends the first effect mode setting process.

  In step S1313-22, the sub CPU 102a stores an effect mode flag representing the effect mode D in the effect mode flag storage area, and the number of executions of the effect mode (Ma, in the present embodiment) associated with the effect mode. 30 times) is set in the effect mode switching counter provided in the sub-RAM 102c, and the first effect mode setting process ends.

  The counter for effect mode switching is performed in a specific effect mode in which the number of effect mode executions (Ma) is set. (In this embodiment, in order to switch to the effect mode A or the effect mode E), the number of executions of the variable effect is counted.

  On the other hand, in step S1313-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the presenting mode A is currently set, that is, whether or not the rendering mode flag “00H” is set in the rendering mode flag storage area.

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is the effect mode A, the effect mode setting process ends. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is not the production mode A, it determines whether or not it is the current production mode E in step S1313-4.

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is not the current effect mode E, it moves the process to step S1313-5, and if it determines that it is the current effect mode E, it moves the process to step S1313-15.

  In step S1313-15, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random value indicated by the random number counter related to the random number for determining the end of the effect mode E.

  In step S1313-16, the sub CPU 102a collates the acquired random number with the effect mode E end determination table in step S1313-15, and determines whether or not the effect mode E ends.

As shown in FIG. 83, in the effect mode E end determination table, a determination result indicating whether to end or continue effect mode E and a random number determination value are stored in association with each other.
The random number determination value is assigned so that the production mode E ends at a rate of “1/30”. Therefore, on average, the effect mode E is determined to end when the special symbol variation display is executed 30 times.

  This “1/30” is set based on the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the execution of the third jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot 3 that triggers the effect mode E. The reason will be described below. In the present embodiment, the number of round games for jackpot 3 that triggers the production mode E is four times, and it is possible to enter each of the big winning openings 8 and 9 in one round. The number is 9, and if one game ball enters each of the big winning openings 8 and 9, the number of prize balls is 13, so the maximum number of winning balls by the execution of the third big hit game corresponding to the big hit 3 is 468 pieces (4 times × 9 pieces × 13 pieces). Further, in this embodiment, when 100 game balls are appropriately fired, an average of 6.4 game balls enter the respective start openings 6 and 7, such as nails and start start openings 6 and 7. Is provided as appropriate. In this case, the special symbol variation display can be executed 30 times ((468/100) × 6.4) for 468 game balls acquired during the third big hit game. From such a calculation result, in the effect mode E, the ratio at which the effect mode E is determined to end is set to “1/30” in order to set the average number of times that the variation display of the special symbol is executed to 30 times.

  In step S1313-3, it is determined whether or not the effect mode E is ended. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode E is ended, the process proceeds to step S1313-18. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode E is not ended, the first effect mode setting process ends.

  On the other hand, in step S1313-5, the sub CPU 102a subtracts and updates the counter value of the effect mode switching counter by “1”. In step S1313-6, the counter value of the effect mode switching counter is “0”. Determine whether or not.

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value of the effect mode switching counter is not “0”, the first effect mode setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when determining that the counter value is “0”, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current rendering mode B is set in step S1313-7. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is the effect mode B, it moves the process to step S1313-8, and if it determines that it is not the effect mode B, it moves the process to step S1313-18.

  In step S1313-8, the sub CPU 120a turns on the effect mode B end designation flag indicating that the effect mode B has ended in the effect mode B end designation flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1313-9, the sub CPU 120a sets an effect mode B end effect control command representing an effect mode B end effect when the effect mode B ends in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and performs the first effect mode setting process. finish.

  The effect mode B end effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. Then, when the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect mode B end effect control command, the effect display mode B end effect of the effect content indicated by the command is output to the image display device 14, the effect lighting device 16, or the like. Let the device run. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122 (f) and FIG. 125 (f), the effect mode B end effect is displayed on the left and right sides of the display area 140 after the special decorative design of the last variation effect in the effect mode B is stopped and displayed. The eyelids are closed from both ends, and an image G75 with the eyelids closed as shown in FIGS. 122 (g) and 125 (g) is displayed, which is an effect for informing that the effect mode B has ended.

  In step S1313-10, the sub CPU 102a refers to the jackpot effect symbol data storage area of the sub RAM 102c and confirms the jackpot effect symbol indicated by the latest stored jackpot effect symbol data.

  In step S1313-11, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the jackpot that triggered the setting of the effect mode B is a jackpot 3, that is, the latest data of the jackpot effect symbol data confirmed in step S1313-10 is the jackpot. Whether or not 3 is determined. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the jackpot that triggered the setting of the effect mode B is the jackpot 3, the process proceeds to step S1313-3, and the effect mode flag indicating the effect mode E is set in the effect mode flag storage area. (Set production mode E). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot that triggered the setting of the effect mode B is not the jackpot 3, the process proceeds to step S1313-3, and the effect mode flag indicating the effect mode A is set in the effect mode flag storage area (effect). Set mode A).

In short, when the production mode is set with the end of the production mode B which is a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state, the jackpot that triggered the setting of the production mode B is jackpot 1, jackpot 2 or jackpot 5, In other words, if the profit given to the player is a big jackpot (16R jackpot), the mode is set to the production mode A, and the jackpot that triggered the setting of the production mode B is the jackpot 3, that is, the profit given to the player Is a big hit (4R big hit) smaller than the big hit 1, big hit 2 or big hit 5, the production mode E is set.
As described above, when the production mode B set with a big jackpot (4R jackpot) as a trigger when the profit given to the player is smaller than the jackpot 1, jackpot 2 or jackpot 5 is finished, the performance is a normal performance mode. Before setting the mode A, setting the effect mode E to perform a special effect different from the effect mode A can improve the interest of the game.

  In step S1313-3, the sub CPU 102a performs specific effect mode effect clear processing for clearing the jackpot effect symbol data storage area and the effect condition satisfaction number counter.

  In step S1313-14, the sub CPU 102a sets an effect mode effect control command representing the effect mode A or effect mode E in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the first effect mode setting process.

  The effect mode effect control command representing the effect mode A or effect mode E set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect mode effect control command representing the effect mode A or the effect mode E, the lamp control substrate 104 and the image control board 105 perform the effect in the effect mode A or the effect mode E. The effect content is set in advance in the effect mode A or the effect mode E. When the effect mode A or the effect mode E is set, at least a background image and a sound displayed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14. The output of BGM output from the output device 15 is executed as a basic effect in the effect mode.

(Second look-ahead effect determination process of effect control board)
The second look-ahead effect determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 53.

  In step S1314-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the flag is turned on in the effect mode B end designation flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If it is determined that the flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1314-2, and if it is determined that the flag is not ON, the second prefetch effect determination process ends.

  In step S1314-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the start opening prize designation command stored in the second effect information storage area has reach. If the sub CPU 102a determines that there is a reach, it moves the process to step S1314-3. If it determines that there is no reach, the sub CPU 102a ends the second prefetch effect determination process.

  In step S1314-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the start opening winning designation command stored in the second effect information storage area is a big hit. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to step S1314-4 and selects the special figure hold display special mode first determination table. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1314-7.

  In step S1314-5, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the number of scheduled changes in the second special figure hold corresponding to the start opening winning designation command that is a big hit is 101 times. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the expected number of fluctuations in the second special figure hold, which is a big hit, is 101 times, the process moves to step S1314-1, and the planned change number in the second special figure hold, which is a big hit, is not the 101st. If determined, the process proceeds to step S1314-6, and the special figure hold display special mode transition designation flag is turned ON in the special figure hold display special mode transition designation flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1314-7, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the newest start opening winning designation command stored in the second effect information storage area is SPSP reach. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is SPSP reach, it moves the process to step S1314-8, and selects the special figure hold display special mode second determination table. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not SPSP reach, the process proceeds to step S1314-1.

  In step S1314-9, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the number of second special figure reservations currently reserved is one. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the number of second special figure reservations is one, it moves the process to step S1314-16, and if it determines that the number of second special figure reservations is not one, the process proceeds to step S1314-10. The special figure hold display special mode transition designation flag is turned ON in the special figure hold display special mode transition designation flag storage area of the sub-RAM 102c.

  In step S1314-11, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the newest start opening winning designation command stored in the second effect information storage area is SP reach. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the SP reach is reached, it moves the process to step S1314-12 and selects the special figure hold display special mode third determination table. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not SP reach, the process proceeds to step S1314-15, and the special figure hold display special mode fourth determination table is selected.

  In step S <b> 1314-13, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether or not there is SPSP reach in the start opening winning designation command stored in the second effect information storage area. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the SPSP reach is present, the process proceeds to step S1314-16. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the SPSP reach is not present, the process proceeds to step S1314-1 and the sub-RAM 102c shifts to the special figure hold display special mode. The special figure hold display special mode transition designation flag is set to ON in the designated flag storage area.

  In step S1314-16, the sub CPU 102a confirms the current second special figure reservation count, and in step S1314-1, acquires the random value indicated by the random number counter related to the special figure hold display special mode determination random number.

  In step S1314-18, the sub CPU 102a uses the second special figure hold number confirmed in step S1314-16 and the special figure hold display special mode determination random number obtained in step S1314-17 as the above step S1314-4. The special figure hold display special mode is selected by comparing with the special figure hold display special mode determination table selected in step S1314-8, step S1314-12, and step S1314-15.

  As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the special figure hold display special mode first determination table to the special figure hold display special mode fourth determination table are associated with the start opening prize designation command and the second special figure hold number. Each special figure hold display special mode first determination table to special figure hold display special mode fourth determination table includes a plurality of random number determination values and special figure hold display special mode data indicating the special figure hold display special mode. They are stored in association with a predetermined probability.

  The special figure hold display special mode is a display mode of the second special figure hold image that is changed at the end of the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, and suggests a jackpot expectation. As will be described in detail later, the second special figure reserved image changed to the special figure hold display special mode is displayed in the second prefetch effect suggesting mode when winning.

The special figure hold display special mode is set for each second special figure hold number.
Special aspects 1 to 4 are set as special figure hold display special aspects when the number of second special figure reservations is “1”, and the jackpot expectation degree related to the special aspects is special aspect 1 <special aspect 2 < It is higher in the order of special mode 3 <special mode 4.
In addition, special modes 5 to 8 are set as special map hold display special modes when the second special map reservation number is “2”, and the jackpot expectation degree related to the special mode is expressed as special mode 5 <special mode It is higher in the order of 6 <special aspect 7 <special aspect 8.
In addition, special modes 9 to 12 are set as special map display special modes when the second special map reservation number is “3”, and the jackpot expectation degree related to the special mode is expressed as special mode 9 <special mode 10 <special aspect 11 <higher in the order of special aspect 12.
In addition, special modes 13 to 16 are set as special map hold display special modes when the second special map reservation number is “4”, and the jackpot expectation degree related to the special mode is expressed as special mode 13 <special mode 14 <special aspect 15 <higher in the order of special aspect 16.

Here, the special figure hold display special mode will be described with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 86, for each special figure hold display special mode, the specific effect content of the special figure hold display special mode (the specific display mode of the second special figure hold image) and the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the effect content Suggestions are shown.
In FIG. 86, 16 solid cells arranged under the item “effect content” each represent the second special figure holding display area 143 of the display area 140 of the image display device 14. Each square is divided into four by broken lines, and corresponds to the first display unit 143A, the second display unit 143B, the third display unit 143C, and the fourth display unit 143D of FIG. 122 from the left.
In addition, in the item “suggestion”, “expected jackpot expectation” is low, indicating that the expectation of jackpot is low, and “expected jackpot expectation” is indicating that the expectation of jackpot is high, “Big jackpot expectation“ Medium ”” indicates that the jackpot expectation is higher than “Big hit expectation“ Low ”, but the jackpot expectation is lower than“ High hit expectation “High”. The expectation “determined” indicates that the jackpot is won.
In the following description, the second special figure reservation image displayed on the first display unit 143A of the second special figure reservation display area 143 is referred to as the second special figure reservation image 1 and the second display unit 143B. The second special figure reserved image is displayed on the second special figure reserved image 2 and the second special figure reserved image displayed on the third display unit 143C is displayed on the second special figure reserved image 3 and the fourth display unit 143D. The second special figure reservation image is referred to as a second special figure reservation image 4.

As shown in FIG. 86, the special mode 1 represents the effect content in which the display mode of the second special figure holding image 1 is changed to the display mode with the character “?”.
Moreover, the special mode 2 represents the effect content by which the display mode of the 2nd special figure reservation image 1 is changed into the display mode to which the character "normal" was attached.
Moreover, the special mode 3 represents the effect content by which the display mode of the 2nd special figure reservation image 1 is changed into the display mode to which the character "demon" was attached.
Moreover, the special mode 4 represents the effect content by which the display mode of the 2nd special figure reservation image 1 is changed into the display mode to which the character "celebration" was attached.

In the special mode 5, the display mode of the second special figure hold image 1 is changed to the display mode with the character “?”, And the display mode of the second special figure hold image 2 is added with the character “?”. The contents of the effect changed to the display mode.
Further, in the special mode 6, the display mode of the second special figure reservation image 1 is changed to the display mode with the character “small”, and the display mode of the second special figure reservation image 2 is added with the character “K”. The contents of the effect changed to the display mode.
Further, in the special mode 7, the display mode of the second special figure reservation image 1 is changed to the display mode with the character “middle”, and the display mode of the second special figure reservation image 2 is added with the character “kichi”. The contents of the effect changed to the display mode.
In the special mode 8, the display mode of the second special figure reservation image 1 is changed to the display mode with the letters “Large”, and the display mode of the second special figure reservation image 2 is added with the letters “Kichi”. The contents of the effect changed to the display mode.

In the special mode 9, the display mode of the second special figure reservation image 1 is changed to the display mode with the character “?”, And the display mode of the second special figure reservation image 2 is added with the character “?”. The display content is changed to the display mode and the display mode of the second special figure reservation image 3 is changed to the display mode with the character “?”.
Further, in the special mode 10, the display mode of the second special figure hold image 1 is changed to the display mode with the character “normal”, and the display mode of the second special figure hold image 2 is added with the character “large”. The display content is changed to the display mode, and the display mode of the second special figure reservation image 3 is changed to the display mode with the character “Ran”.
Further, in the special mode 11, the display mode of the second special figure hold image 1 is changed to the display mode with the character “up”, and the display mode of the second special figure hold image 2 is added with the character “machine”. The display content is changed to the display mode, and the display mode of the second special figure reservation image 3 is changed to the display mode with the character “dislike”.
Further, in the special mode 12, the display mode of the second special figure reservation image 1 is changed to the display mode with the character “most”, and the display mode of the second special figure reservation image 2 is added with the character “high”. The display content is changed to the display mode, and the display mode of the second special figure reservation image 3 is changed to the display mode with the character “tide”.

In the special mode 13, the display mode of the second special figure reservation image 1 is changed to the display mode with the character “?”, And the display mode of the second special figure reservation image 2 is added with the character “?”. The display mode of the second special figure hold image 3 is changed to the display mode with the character “?”, And the display mode of the second special figure hold image 4 is added with the character “?”. The contents of the effect changed to the display mode.
Further, in the special mode 14, the display mode of the second special figure hold image 1 is changed to the display mode with the character “luck”, and the display mode of the second special figure hold image 2 is set with the character “Ki”. The display mode of the second special figure hold image 3 is changed to the display mode with the letters “up”, and the display mode of the second special figure hold image 4 is added with the letters “rising”. The contents of the effect changed to the display mode.
Further, in the special mode 15, the display mode of the second special figure hold image 1 is changed to the display mode with the character “good”, and the display mode of the second special figure hold image 2 is added with the character “machine”. The display mode of the second special figure hold image 3 is changed to the display mode with the character “arrival”, and the display mode of the second special figure hold image 4 is added with the character “coming”. The contents of the effect changed to the display mode.
Further, in the special mode 16, the display mode of the second special figure reservation image 1 is changed to the display mode with the character “heaven”, and the display mode of the second special figure reservation image 2 is added with the character “bottom”. The display mode of the second special figure hold image 3 is changed to the display mode with the character “none”, and the display mode of the second special figure hold image 4 is added with the character “enemy”. The contents of the effect changed to the display mode.

  In step S1314-19, the sub CPU 102a indicates that the special figure hold display special mode determined in step S1314-18 is determined to be a big win winning special mode 4, special mode 8, special mode 12, and special mode 16. It is determined whether it is any of these. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is a special mode (4, 8, 12, 16) that suggests that the jackpot winning is confirmed, it moves the process to step S1314-24 and suggests that the jackpot winning is confirmed. If it is determined that it is not the special mode (4, 8, 12, 16), the process proceeds to step S1314-20.

  In step S1314-20, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the special figure hold display special mode transition designation flag is ON in the special figure hold display special mode transition designation flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the special figure hold display special mode transition designation flag is ON, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1314-21, and determines that the special figure hold display special mode transition designation flag is not ON. The process moves to S1314-25.

  In step S1314-21, the sub CPU 102a selects a special figure hold display special mode transition pattern determination table. In step S1314-2, the sub CPU 102a selects a random value indicated by the random number counter related to the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern determination random number. get.

  In step S1314-23, the sub CPU 102a collates the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern determination table selected in step S1314-21 with the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern determination random number acquired in step S1314-22. Then, the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern determination table is associated with the start opening prize designation command and the second special figure hold number, and the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern determination table includes A plurality of random number determination values and special figure hold display special mode transition pattern data indicating a transition mode are stored in association with each other with a predetermined probability.

  The special figure hold display special mode transition pattern is the color of the second special figure hold image from when the second special figure hold image, which is the target of the second look-ahead effect, is displayed in a special form until it is deleted. It is a transition mode (scenario).

In addition, the types of colors of the second special figure reserved image displayed in the special mode are white, which is a normal color, blue which suggests that the expectation degree of jackpot is relatively low, and the expectation degree of jackpot which is higher than blue There are four types: red, which suggests this, and purple, which indicates that the expectation of jackpot is higher than red. A plurality of special figure reservation display special mode transition patterns combining the colors of the second special figure reservation images displayed in these special modes are prepared.
Note that the degree of jackpot expectation suggested by the color transition mode of the second special figure reserved image increases in the order of “white” <“blue” <“red” <“purple”.

  In step S1314-24, the sub CPU 102a turns off the special figure hold display special mode transition designation flag in the special figure hold display special mode transition designation flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1314-2, the sub CPU 102a sets the special figure hold display special mode data determined in step S1314-1 in the special figure hold display special mode data storage area.

  In step S1314-26, the sub CPU 102a sets the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern data determined in step S1314-23 in the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern data storage area.

(Special game production pattern determination process of production control board)
The special game effect pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1318-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the effect mode buffer, confirms the effect mode when the special game determination relating to the special game to be performed is performed, and the special mode associated with the effect mode. A game effect pattern determination table is selected. This is because the special game effect pattern determination table is divided according to the effect mode when the special game determination related to the special game is performed (see FIG. 88 and FIG. 89).

  In step S1318-2, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the special game opening designation command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and selects a special game effect pattern determination table associated with the special game opening designation command. This is because the special game effect pattern determination table divided by the effect mode is further divided by the special game opening designation command (see FIG. 88 and FIG. 89).

  In the present embodiment, in each special game effect pattern determination table, one or more special game effect patterns are stored in association with the special game effect pattern determination value. FIG. 88 and FIG. The random number judgment value ratio shown in FIG. The special game effect pattern is a piece of identification information representing the effect content of the special game effect that is the effect at the opening and round games from the start of the special game until the ending is started in the special game. That is, the specific display mode of the special game effect performed by the image display device 14, the sound output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, the effect accessory device 17, and the effect button device 18 is associated with each other. Yes.

  Components of special game effects such as the time of special game effects, the contents of the effect button effects, the effect development structure, and the like are associated with the specific effect modes of the special game effects.

  In step S1318-3, the sub CPU 102a acquires the random value indicated by the random number counter related to the special game effect pattern determination random number. In step S1318-4, the sub CPU 102a uses the acquired special game effect pattern determination random number as the special game effect pattern. Special game effect pattern determination is performed in which a special game effect pattern is determined by collating with the determination table.

  In step S1318-5, the sub CPU 102a sets a special game effect control command representing the special game effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1318-6, special game effect data corresponding to the special game effect pattern is obtained. In the special game effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c, in step S1318-7, the special game effect time which is the effect time of the special game effect is set in the special game effect timer counter of the sub RAM 102c, and the special game effect pattern The decision process is terminated.

  The special game effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the special game effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 cause the effect device such as the image display device 14 to execute the special game effect based on the special game effect pattern indicated by the command.

  Further, the special game effect timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S1200. The sub CPU 102a can specify the remaining time of the special game effect, in other words, the time elapsed since the start of the special game effect, by the special game effect timer counter.

(Special drawing hold display mode change process of production control board)
With reference to FIG. 55, the special figure hold display mode changing process by the effect control board 102 will be described.

  In step S1319-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not all the special figure reservations currently reserved are in the normal mode. If the sub CPU 102a determines that all are in the normal mode, the process proceeds to step S1319-5, and if it is determined that all are not in the normal mode, the process proceeds to step S1319-2.

  In step S1319-2, the sub CPU 102a clears all data related to the special figure reservation image stored in the sub RAM 102c. The data relating to the special figure hold image is special figure hold display mode data, special figure hold display special mode shift pattern data, and special map hold display special mode shift pattern data.

  In step S1319-3, the sub CPU 102a sets the special figure hold display normal mode data in the special figure hold display mode data storage area for all the special figure hold currently reserved.

  In step S1319-4, the sub CPU 102a turns on the special game start special figure hold display change designation flag storage area in the special game start special figure hold display change designation flag storage area of the sub RAM 102a.

  In step S1319-5, the sub CPU 102a sets a special figure hold non-display control command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the special figure hold display mode changing process.

  The special figure hold non-display control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the special figure hold non-display control command, the variable hold display area 141, the first special figure hold display area 142, and the second special figure hold display in the display area 140 are displayed. The special figure hold image displayed in the area 143 is hidden.

(Processing through specific area of production control board)
The specific area passing process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1323-1, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific area passing flag in the specific area passing flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1322-2 sets a specific area passing effect control command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The specific area passing process is terminated.

  The specific area passing effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the specific area passing effect control command, the specific area passing effect indicated by the specific area passing effect control command is transmitted to the image display device 14 and the effect lighting device 16. (E.g., an image “V” suggesting that the game ball has passed through the specific area 12 is displayed in a predetermined area of the display area 140, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the audio output device 15. Is applied in a specific manner, and the movable part 17A of the effect accessory device 17 is operated in a specific manner).

(Ending effect pattern determination process of effect control board)
The ending effect pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1325-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode buffer to check the effect mode when the special game determination related to the special game currently being performed is performed. In step S1325-2, the sub CPU 102a The ending designation command stored in the reception buffer of the RAM 102c is analyzed, and in step S1325-3, the specific area passage flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c is confirmed, and whether or not the specific area passage flag is ON, that is, It is confirmed whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area 12 during the special game. Note that the specific area passing flag is cleared after confirmation if it is ON.

  In step S1325-4, the sub CPU 102a performs ending effect pattern determination for determining an ending effect pattern.

  The ending game effect pattern is identification information representing the effect content of the ending effect performed in the ending of the special game. The image display device 14, the sound output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, and the effect accessory device 17. And the concrete effect aspect of the ending effect performed by the effect button device 18 is matched.

  Components of special game effects such as the time of the ending effect, the contents of the effect button effect, and the effect development structure are associated with a specific effect mode of the ending effect.

  The ending effect pattern determination is performed using an ending effect pattern determination table. As shown in FIG. 90A, in the ending effect pattern determination table, the combination of the effect mode indicated by the effect mode buffer, the ending designation command, and the ON / OFF of the specific area passing flag is associated with the ending effect pattern. Yes. Therefore, in the ending effect pattern determination, the sub CPU 102a collates the ending effect pattern determination table with the effect mode, the ending designation command, and the ON / OFF of the specific area passing flag confirmed in steps S1325-1 to S1325-3, Determine the ending production pattern.

  In step S1325-5, the sub CPU 102a sets an ending effect control command representing the ending effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1325-6, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect mode determination for determining an effect mode to be set after the special game currently being ended.

  The effect mode determination is performed using the effect mode determination table. As shown in FIG. 90 (b), in the effect mode determination table, a combination of an ending designation command and ON / OFF of a specific area passage flag is associated with the effect mode. Therefore, in the effect mode determination, the sub CPU 102a collates the ending designation command and the specific area passage flag ON / OFF confirmed in steps S1325-2 to S1325-3 with the effect mode determination table to determine the effect mode. .

  In step S1325-7, the sub CPU 102a performs effect mode setting for setting the determined effect mode. In the production mode setting, the production mode flag indicating the decided production mode is stored in the production mode flag storage area, and the production mode executable number associated with the production mode is changed to the production mode switching provided in the sub RAM 102c. Set for counter. In the present embodiment, the number of times that the effect mode B and the effect mode C can be performed is set to 100 times.

  In step S1325-8, the sub CPU 102a sets an effect mode effect control command representing the determined effect mode in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  The ending effect control command and the effect mode effect control command set in the transmission buffer are transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the ending effect control command and the effect mode effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 first generate an ending effect based on the ending effect pattern indicated by the ending effect control command. When the ending effect is finished, the effect in the effect mode indicated by the effect mode effect control command is performed. In each effect mode, the effect contents are set in advance, and when the effect mode is set, at least the background image displayed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 and the BGM output from the audio output device 15 are displayed. It is executed as a basic production by output and production mode.

  In step S1325-9, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the newly set effect mode is the effect mode B or the effect mode C. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is the effect mode B or the effect mode C, it moves the process to step S13225-10, and if it determines that it is not the effect mode B or the effect mode C, it moves the process to step S13225-16.

  In step S <b> 1325-10, the sub CPU 102 a transmits an effect mode remaining number display start command indicating the number of times that the effect mode can be executed in the effect mode B and the effect mode C and the display location display command in order to start the effect mode remaining number display. set.

  The effect mode remaining count display start command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. Then, when the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect mode remaining number display start command, the ending effect is ended, and the effect in the new effect mode B or effect mode C is performed, and the remaining number of effect modes. The remaining number of effects mode of the effects indicated by the display control command is displayed.

  In step S1325-11, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the newly set effect mode is the effect mode B. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is the effect mode B, it moves the process to step S1325-2, and if it determines that it is not the effect mode B, it moves the process to step S1325-2.

  In step S1325-12, the sub CPU 102a checks the counter value of the effect condition satisfaction number counter in the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1325-2, transmits an effect condition satisfaction number display control command indicating the number of times and the display location to the sub RAM 102c. Set to buffer.

  In step S1325-14, the sub CPU 102a refers to the jackpot effect symbol data storage area of the sub RAM 102c, confirms the jackpot effect symbols indicated by all the stored jackpot effect symbol data, and the order in which the symbols are stored. In step S1325-15, a jackpot effect symbol history display control command indicating the type of jackpot effect symbol, its stored order and display location is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c.

  The effect condition satisfaction number display control command and the jackpot effect symbol history display control command set in the transmission buffer are transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect condition satisfaction number display control command and the jackpot effect symbol history display control command, the ending effect is finished, and an effect is produced in the new effect mode B. An effect condition satisfaction number display of the effect content indicated by the effect condition satisfaction number display control command and a jackpot effect symbol history display of the effect content indicated by the jackpot effect symbol history display control command are performed.

  In step S1325-16, the sub CPU 102a confirms the effect symbol stop display pattern related to the special game currently being performed, and sets the effect symbol stop display control command indicating the effect symbol stop display pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. To do.

  The effect symbol stop display control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. Then, when the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect symbol stop display control command, the ending effect ends, the effect is performed in the new effect mode, and the effect contents indicated by the effect symbol stop display control command are displayed. Stop display of the effect design.

  In step S1325-17, the sub CPU 102a sets a special figure hold redisplay control command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the ending effect pattern determination process.

  The special figure hold redisplay control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the special figure hold re-display control command, the ending effect is finished, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 are switched to the effect display in the new effect mode and are not displayed. The figure hold image is displayed again in the first special figure hold display area 142 and the second special figure hold display area 143 of the display area 140.

(Special drawing hold production control processing of production control board)
The special figure reservation effect control process by the effect control board 102 is demonstrated using FIG.

  In step S1400-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the flag related to the special figure holding effect control is turned on in the sub RAM 102c. The flags related to the special figure hold effect control are a special figure hold occurrence designation flag, a special figure hold extinction designation flag, a special game start hold change designation flag, and a production mode B end designation flag. It means change timing. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the flag related to the special figure hold effect control is ON, the process proceeds to step S1400-2. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the flag related to the special figure hold effect control is not ON, the special figure hold effect is determined. The control process ends.

  In step S1400-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the special figure hold occurrence designation flag is turned on in the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the special figure hold occurrence designation flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1400-3. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the special figure hold occurrence designation flag is not ON, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to step S1400-7.

  In step S1400-3, the sub CPU 102a turns off the special figure hold occurrence designation flag in the special figure hold occurrence designation flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1400-4, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not special figure hold display special mode transition pattern data is set in the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern data storage area. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern data is set, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1400-5 and confirms the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern data. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern data is not set, the process proceeds to step S1400-6 to check the data stored in the special figure hold display mode data storage area.

  In step S1400-7, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the special figure hold erasure designation flag is turned on in the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the special figure hold erasure designation flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1400-8. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the special figure hold erasure designation flag is not ON, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to step S1400-13.

  In step S1400-8, the sub CPU 102a turns off the special figure hold erasure designation flag in the special figure hold erasure designation flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1400-9, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not special figure hold display special mode transition pattern data is set in the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern data storage area. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern data is set, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1400-11 and confirms the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern data. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern data is not set, the process proceeds to step S1400-10.

  In step S1400-10, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not special figure hold display special mode transition pattern data is set in the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern data storage area. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern data is set, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1400-12 and confirms the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern data. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern data is not set, the process proceeds to step S1400-18.

  In step S1400-13, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the special game start special figure hold change flag is turned on in the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the special game start special figure hold change flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1400-14. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the special game start special figure hold change flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S1400-16. Move processing.

  In step S1400-14, the sub CPU 102a turns off the special game start special figure hold display change designation flag storage area in the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1400-15, the sub CPU 102a checks the data stored in the special figure hold display mode data storage area.

  In step S1400-16, the sub CPU 102a turns off the effect mode B end designation flag in the effect mode B end designation flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1400-17, the sub CPU 102a checks the data stored in the special figure hold display mode data storage area.

  In step S1400-18, the sub CPU 102a displays the special figure hold display mode based on the data confirmed in step S1400-5, step S1400-6, step S1400-11, step S1400-12, and step S1400-15. Is generated, and in step S1400-19, the special figure hold effect control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

Note that the special figure holding effect control command set in the transmission buffer is the step S1700.
By the data output process, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 are transmitted. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the special figure hold effect control command, the variable hold display area 141, the first special figure hold display area 142, and the second special figure hold display area in the display area 140 are displayed. 143.

(Production button production control processing of production control board)
The effect button effect control process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1500-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the flag related to the effect button effect is turned on. The flag related to the effect button effect is an effect button normal effect flag and an effect button specific effect flag, and means that an effect is produced by the effect button 18A in the variation effect. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the flag related to the effect button effect is ON, the process proceeds to step S1500-2. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the flag related to the effect button effect is not ON, the effect button effect control process ends. .

  In step S1500-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the operation valid flag is turned on. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the operation valid flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1500-8. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the operation valid flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S1500-3.

  In step S1500-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the specific operation valid start time is reached. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is the specific operation valid start time, it moves the process to step S1500-5, and if it determines that it is not the specific operation valid start time, it moves the process to step S1500-4.

  In step S1500-4, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not it is a normal operation valid start time. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is the normal operation effective start time, it moves the process to step S1500-5, and if it determines that it is not the normal operation effective start time, it ends the effect button effect control process.

  In step S1500-5, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid time in the operation valid timer counter of the sub RAM 102c. In the case where the operation effective time is set after it is determined in step S1500-3 that the operation effective time is the specific operation effective start time, a predetermined time for the second special notice effect is set. On the other hand, when the operation effective time is set after it is determined in step S1500-4 that the normal operation effective start time is reached, the variable effect stored in the variable effect data storage area in the effect button normal effect control table. The operation effective time is determined and set by collating the variation effect pattern indicated by the data and the effect button normal effect number stored in the effect button normal effect number storage area.

  In step S1500-6, the sub CPU 102a turns on the operation valid flag in the operation valid flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. Thereby, the operation effective period in which the operation of the effect button 18A is internally effective starts.

  In step S1500-7, the sub CPU 102a sets an effect button operation instruction effect control command for instructing (or prompting) the operation of the effect button 18A in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1500-8, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the operation effective time has elapsed, that is, whether or not the remaining time of the operation effective period is “0”. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the operation effective time has elapsed, it moves the process to step S1500-10, and if it determines that the operation effective time has not elapsed, it moves the process to step S1500-9.

  In step S1500-9, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not there is a pressing operation detection signal, that is, whether or not the effect button 18A has been operated. If the sub CPU 102a determines that there is a pressing operation detection signal, it moves the process to step S1500-11, and if it determines that there is no pressing operation detection signal, it ends the effect button effect control process.

  In step S1500-10, the sub CPU 102a sets an effect button operation non-effect control command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  The effect button operation non-effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect button operation non-effect control command, the effect when the effect button 18A is not pressed during the operation effective period is displayed in the image display device 14, the effect lighting device 16, and the like. The effect device is executed.

  In step S1500-11, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect button operation presence effect control command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  The effect button operation presence effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1700. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect button operation presence effect control command, the effect when the effect button 18A is pressed during the operation valid period is displayed as the image display device 14, the effect lighting device 16 or the like. The effect device is executed.

  In step S1500-12, the sub CPU 102a turns off the operation valid flag in the operation valid flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. Thereby, the operation valid period in which the operation of the effect button 18A is internally valid ends.

  In step S1500-13, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect button specific effect flag is ON. When determining that the effect button specific effect flag is ON, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1500-18 and sets the effect button specific effect flag to OFF. On the other hand, if it determines with the effect button specific effect flag not being ON, a process will be moved to step S1500-14.

  In step S1500-14, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the number of effect button normal effects is the maximum number of times set in the effect button normal effect, that is, whether or not the effect button normal effect is the last operation effect in the variable effect. Determine. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is the maximum number of times, it moves the process to step S1500-16, and if it determines that it is not the maximum number of times, it moves the process to step S1500-15.

  In step S1500-15, the sub CPU 102a adds “1” to the effect button normal effect number counter of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1500-16, the sub CPU 102a clears the effect button normal effect number counter in the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1500-17, the sub CPU 102a turns off the effect button normal effect flag.

(Game flow)
Next, a basic game flow by the gaming machine Y will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the low-probability state and non-short-time gaming state (production mode A, normal period), which is a normal gaming state, a big win is won and the game ball passes through the specific area 12 in the big hit game (passing is successful) (FIG. 91). (1)), when the jackpot game ends, the gaming state is set to the high probability state and the short time gaming state, the period is set to the first specific period, and the effect mode is set to the effect mode B.

  In this high-probability state and short-time gaming state (production mode B, first specific period), when the special symbol variation display is executed 100 times without winning a jackpot ((2) in FIG. 91), again, The gaming state is set to the low probability state and the non-short-time gaming state, the period is set to the normal period, and the effect mode is set to effect mode A.

  On the other hand, in the low-probability state and the non-short-time gaming state (production mode A, normal period), which is the normal gaming state, the big win is won, but the game ball does not pass through the specific area 12 in the big hit game (passing failure). ((3) in FIG. 91), when the jackpot game ends, the gaming state is set to the low probability state and the short-time gaming state, the period is set to the second specific period, and the effect mode is set to the effect mode C Is done.

  In this low-probability state and short-time gaming state (production mode C, second specific period), when the special symbol variation display is executed 100 times without winning a jackpot ((4) in FIG. 91), again, The gaming state is set to the low probability state and the non-short-time gaming state, the period is set to the normal period, and the effect mode is set to effect mode A.

  In the high-probability state and the short-time gaming state (direction mode B, first specific period), when a big hit is won and the game ball passes through the specific area 12 in the big hit game (passing is successful) ((5) in FIG. 91) ) When the jackpot game ends, the gaming state is set to the high probability state and the short-time gaming state again, the period is set to the first specific period, and the effect mode is set to the effect mode B. In this case, the high probability state remaining number of times (X), the short time state remaining number of times (J), the specific period remaining number of times (T), and the production mode remaining number of times (M) are again set to the high probability state executable number (Xa), The number of time-short state executable times (Ja), the specific period executable times (Ta), and the effect mode executable times (Ma) are set. In this way, when the jackpot is won in the high-probability state and the short-time state, and when the jackpot game ends, the setting to the high-probability state and the short-time game state is referred to as “renso”.

  In the high-probability state and the short-time gaming state (production mode B, first specific period), if the jackpot is won and the game ball does not pass through the specific area 12 in the jackpot game (passing failure) ((6) in FIG. 91) ), When the jackpot game ends, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a short-time gaming state, the period is set to the second specific period, and the effect mode is set to effect mode C.

  Further, in the low probability state and the short-time gaming state (effect mode C, second specific period), when the jackpot is won, and the game ball passes through the specific area 12 in the jackpot game (passing is successful) (in FIG. 91 ( 7)) When the jackpot game ends, the gaming state is set to the high probability state and the short time gaming state, the period is set to the first specific period, and the effect mode is set to effect mode B.

  Further, in the low probability state and the short-time gaming state (effect mode C, second specific period), if the jackpot is won, and the game ball does not pass the specific area 12 in the jackpot game (passing failure) (( 8)) When the jackpot game ends, the gaming state is set to the low probability state and the short-time gaming state again, the period is set to the second specific period, and the effect mode is set to the effect mode C. In this case, the high probability state remaining number of times (X), the short time state remaining number of times (J), the specific period remaining number of times (T), and the production mode remaining number of times (M) are again set to the high probability state executable number (Xa), The number of time-short state executable times (Ja), the specific period executable times (Ta), and the effect mode executable times (Ma) are set.

  In the low probability state and the short time gaming state (effect mode C, second specific period) as shown in (7) and (8) in FIG. 91, winning a jackpot is hereinafter referred to as “retraction”. This pullback is included in the condominium in that it has not been returned to the normal gaming state after it has been set once from the normal gaming state to the high probability state and the short-time gaming state or the low probability state and the short-time gaming state. To do. That is, the low-probability state and the short-time gaming state set after the high-probability state and the short-time gaming state can be said to be a state in which the villa is still continued.

  In addition, although not shown, in the high probability state and short-time gaming state (effect mode B, first specific period) or in the low probability state and short-time game state (effect mode C, second specific period) In this case, the game state, the effect mode, and the specific period are not changed, and the game at the time of the small hit game is continued as it is. In this case, the high probability state remaining number (X), the short time state remaining number (J), the specific period remaining number (T), and the production mode remaining number (M) are also those at the time of the small hit game after the small hit game. Is continued as it is.

  In a low-probability state and a non-short-time gaming state (production mode A, normal period) that are normal gaming states, when winning a small hit ((9) in FIG. 91), it relates to the success / failure of the passing of the specific area 12 of the gaming ball. In addition, even after the small hit game ends, the gaming state continues in the low probability state and the non-short-time game state, but when the small hit game ends, the period is set to the third specific period, The mode is set to effect mode D.

  In the low probability state and non-short-time gaming state (effect mode D, third specific period) different from the normal gaming state, when the special symbol variation display is executed 30 times without winning a jackpot (in FIG. 91) (10)) While the gaming state does not change, the low probability state and the non-time-saving gaming state are continued as they are, while the period is set to the normal period and the production mode is set to the production mode A.

  Also, in the case of (9) in FIG. 91, when a small win is won again in the low probability state and non-short-time gaming state (effect mode D, third specific period) different from the normal gaming state ((11) in FIG. 91) In the same manner as described above, regardless of the success or failure of the passing of the specific area 12 of the game ball, even after the small hit game ends, the gaming state does not change and the low-probability state and the non-short-time gaming state are continued. When the small hit game ends, the period is set to the third specific period again, and the production mode is set to the production mode D. In this case, the specific period remaining number of times (T) and the effect mode remaining number of times (M) are set again with the specific period executable number (Ta) and the effect mode executable number (Ma).

  In the low-probability state and the non-short-time gaming state (production mode D, third specific period), the subsequent game flow in the case of winning the jackpot will be the low-probability state and the non-time-short gaming state (production mode A, normal period). This is the same as the case ((12), (13) in FIG. 91).

  In any game state, the jackpot 3 is won, and in the jackpot game, in the high-probability state and the short-time game state (effect mode B, first specific period) when the game ball passes the specific area 12, the jackpot If the special symbol variation display is executed 100 times without winning ((14) in FIG. 91), the gaming state is set to the low probability state and the non-short-time gaming state, the period is set to the normal period, and the effect mode is The production mode E is set.

  In the low-probability state and non-short-time gaming state (production mode E, normal period), the subsequent game flow in the case of winning a big win and small-bonus will be the low-probability state and non-time-short gaming state (production mode A). , Normal period) ((15), (17), (18) in FIG. 91).

  In the low-probability state and the non-short-time gaming state (effect mode E, normal period), as described above, the end of the effect mode E is determined for each special figure variation display, and the end determination indicates that the operation is ended. If it is determined ((16) in FIG. 91), the gaming state does not change and the low-probability state, the non-short-time gaming state, and the normal period are continued as they are, but the rendering mode is set to rendering mode A. .

  In the low-probability state and the non-time-saving gaming state (effect mode E, normal period), as described above, the end of the effect mode E is determined for each special figure variation display, and the continuation is determined by the end determination. When it is determined ((19) in FIG. 91), the gaming state does not change, and the low probability state, non-short-time gaming state, normal period, and effect mode E are continued as they are.

  In the description of the game flow of the gaming machine Y, there is a failure to pass through the specific area 12. This is because a fourth big hit game in which it is difficult to pass the game ball through the specific area 12, and the fourth big hit game is executed. When the game ball does not pass through the specific area 12 during the execution of the game, and the first, second, and third big hit games that allow the game ball to pass through the specific area 12 are executed. This includes a case where the game ball does not pass through the specific area 12 during the execution of.

(Production condition satisfaction count display and jackpot effect design history display)
Next, the presentation condition satisfaction count display and the jackpot presentation symbol history display performed in the presentation mode B will be described. FIG. 99A shows an extracted part of a standard screen configuration displayed in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 in the effect mode B. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 99A, the effect condition satisfaction number display is performed in the first area 140A of the display area 140, and an effect condition satisfaction number image G71 representing the effect condition satisfaction number is displayed in the first area 140A. On the other hand, the jackpot effect symbol history display is performed in the second region 140B of the display region 140, and the jackpot effect symbol indicating the type of jackpot is displayed in the second region 140B. In effect mode B, effect mode remaining count image G73 representing the remaining number of effect modes is displayed in third area 140C of display area 140, and effect mode image G74 indicating the name of effect mode B (MMRUSH) is displayed area 140. Are displayed in the fourth area 140D. In the effect mode C, the effect condition satisfaction number display and the jackpot effect symbol history display are not performed, but as shown in FIG. 99 (b), the effect mode remaining number image G73 is displayed in the third area 140C of the display area 140. The effect mode image G74 that is displayed and indicates the name of the effect mode C (AR time) is displayed in the fourth area 140D of the display area 140.

  The effect condition satisfaction number display is a display of the number of times that a preset effect condition is satisfied (hereinafter referred to as “the effect condition satisfaction number”). In the present embodiment, the performance condition is a specific jackpot that easily causes a high probability state and a time-short state in the high probability state and the short time state (rendering mode B) (in this embodiment, the big jackpot, the big jackpot 1, the big jackpot It is set to execute a specific effect that becomes a notification of winning of 2 or jackpot 3).

  In the present embodiment, a specific effect is an effect in which a friendly character wins in a confrontation effect (a normal victory or a resurgence victory in FIG. 69), a predetermined mission set in advance (for example, correct answer to a quiz, etc.) ) The production that succeeds in the mission production, or the movable part 17A of the production-use accessory device 17 operates in a specific manner, and the sound output device 15 produces a specific sound effect (for example, “Cuin, Cuin, Cuine”). Is set to the final production. In the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 69, when a variation effect is performed with a variation effect pattern that is “◯” in the item of satisfaction of the effect condition, the counter value of the effect condition satisfaction number counter is incremented by “1”. At the same time, “1” is added to the number of times of effect condition satisfaction related to the display of the number of effect condition satisfaction. According to the present embodiment, the performance condition is always satisfied when the variation production related to the winning of 5, big hit 1, big hit 2, or big hit 3 is executed.

  The number of performance condition satisfactions is counted by the sub CPU 102a using an effect condition satisfaction number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c, and the number of times corresponding to the counter value of the effect condition satisfaction number counter is displayed. Is executed and the production condition satisfaction number counter is cleared (step S1313-13). That is, while the consecutive resort is continuing (including pullback), the number of performance condition satisfactions is held.

  On the other hand, with the jackpot effect design history display, until the jackpot 1 to jackpot 3 or the jackpot 5 is newly won, the stage mode B or stage mode C is executed the number of times that the stage mode can be performed and stage mode A is set. By displaying all the jackpot presentation symbols consisting of images (icons) that indicate the type of jackpot that was won during the period, so that the order of winning can be specified (displaying the history of the stage symbols corresponding to all the winning jackpots) is there. As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, the jackpot effect symbol is associated with the effect mode and the jackpot type related to winning.

  A jackpot effect design consisting of a red number “7” indicating that a jackpot 1, 3 jackpots or 5 jackpots were won in a non-short-time state as a jackpot effect design, yellow indicating a jackpot 2 in a non-time-short state A jackpot effect design consisting of a star (☆) and a blue effect “7” indicating that the jackpot 4 was won in a non-time-saving state (see FIG. 65).

  In addition, as a jackpot effect design, suggesting that the jackpot 1 or jackpot 5 was won in the short time state, the jackpot effect design consisting of the blue number “7” with the letter “pole” attached to the lower right, A jackpot effect design consisting of a yellow star (☆) suggesting that the jackpot 2 was won, and a jackpot effect design consisting of a yellow letter “B” suggesting that the jackpot 3 or 4 was won in a short time state It is set (see FIG. 66).

  As shown in FIG. 99 (a), in the second area 140B in which the jackpot effect symbol history display is performed, 50 squares of 5 × 10 are divided, and the jackpot effect symbols are selected in the order of winning from the upper left square. It will be displayed on the right and when you reach it, it will be displayed on the right in the order of winning from the left end of the lower row.

  The jackpot effect symbol history display is executed by the sub CPU 102a based on the jackpot effect symbol data stored in the jackpot effect symbol data storage area provided in the sub RAM 102c. When the effect mode can be executed a number of times and the effect mode A is set, the jackpot effect symbol data storage area is cleared (step S1313-6). That is, while the consecutive villa continues (including pullback), the jackpot effect symbol history related to the jackpot effect symbol history display is held.

  Here, the presentation condition satisfaction number display and the jackpot presentation symbol history display will be described using specific examples. Note that the game ball passing through the specific area 12 in the special game is referred to as “specific area winning”, and the game ball not passing through the specific area 12 in the special game is referred to as “specific area non-winning”.

  In the case of the specific example 1 as shown in FIG. 92 (a), in the production mode A, after winning the jackpot 3 first and winning the specific area, the production conditions are not yet satisfied. The number of performance condition satisfactions indicated by the condition satisfaction number display is “0”, and the jackpot effect symbol “7 (red)” indicating the 3 wins in the effect mode A is displayed in the upper left of the second area 140B as the jackpot effect symbol history display. (See FIG. 100-1 (a)).

  Next, in the first production mode B, the big win 5 was won, and in the second production mode B after winning the specific area, the production conditions were satisfied based on the big win 5 (the specific production was executed). Therefore, the performance condition satisfaction count indicated by the performance condition satisfaction count display is “1”, and the jackpot production symbol history display is a win of 3 jackpots in the previous production mode A from the upper left square of the second area 140B to the right. A jackpot effect symbol “7 (red)” indicating “” and a jackpot effect symbol “7 poles” indicating a winning of the jackpot 5 in the current effect mode B are displayed (see FIG. 100-1 (b)).

  Next, similarly, in the second effect mode B, the big win 5 is won, and in the third effect mode B after winning the specific area, the effect condition is satisfied based on the winner of the big hit 5, The number of satisfaction of the presentation condition indicated by the satisfaction count display is “2”, and the first jackpot presentation symbol “7” from the upper left square of the second area 140B to the right as the jackpot presentation symbol history display and the second jackpot The production symbol “7 poles” and the current jackpot production symbol “7 poles” (see FIG. 100-1 (c)).

  After winning the big hit 5 in the third production mode B and not winning the specific area, the production mode C is entered. Since it is production mode C, production condition satisfaction number display and jackpot production design history display are not performed (refer to Drawing 100-1 (d)). However, since the big hit 5 is won in the third effect mode B, the counter value of the effect condition satisfaction number counter is “3”. Since the jackpot effect symbol data storage area is not cleared because the effect mode A is not set, the jackpot effect symbol indicating the jackpot effect symbol “7 (red)” is displayed in the first storage portion of the jackpot effect symbol data storage area. Data, jackpot effect design data indicating the jackpot effect design symbol “7 poles” in the second storage unit, jackpot effect design data indicating the jackpot effect design symbol “7 poles” in the third storage unit, and jackpot effect design data “7” in the fourth storage unit The jackpot effect design data indicating “pole” is stored.

  Next, after winning the jackpot 5 in the effect mode C and winning a specific area, the effect mode B is entered again. Therefore, in the effect mode B, the effect condition satisfaction number display and the jackpot effect symbol history display are re-executed (see FIG. 100-1 (e)). Here, since the winning of the jackpot 5 was performed in the production mode C, the production conditions are not satisfied, the counter value of the production condition satisfaction number counter remains “3”, and the production condition satisfaction number display is displayed. The number of performance condition satisfactions shown is “3”. On the other hand, as the jackpot effect symbol history display, from the upper left cell of the second area 140B to the right, the first jackpot effect symbol “7 (red)”, the second jackpot effect symbol “7 pole”, and the third time The jackpot effect symbol “7 poles”, the fourth jackpot effect symbol “7 poles”, and the current jackpot effect symbol “7 poles” are displayed.

  Next, the case of the specific example 2 as shown in FIG. 92B is assumed. Specific example 2 differs from specific example 1 in that the big hit 4 is won in the third performance mode B and the specific area is not won. In this case, as in the above case, the production mode C is set after the special game, but since the big win 3 is won in the third production mode B, the counter value of the production condition satisfaction number counter is “3”. is there. On the other hand, with respect to the jackpot effect symbol data storage area, the first storage unit to the third storage unit are the same as in the case of the specific example 1, but the fourth storage unit is a jackpot indicating the four jackpots in the effect mode B. The jackpot effect symbol data indicating the effect symbol “B” is stored.

  After winning the jackpot 5 in the effect mode C and winning a specific area, the effect mode B is entered again. Also in this case, in the effect mode B, the effect condition satisfaction number display and the jackpot effect symbol history display are re-executed. Here, since the big winning 5 winning was performed in the production mode C, the production conditions are not satisfied, the counter value of the production condition satisfaction number counter remains “3”, and the production condition satisfaction number display is shown. The number of performance condition satisfaction is also “3”. On the other hand, as the jackpot effect symbol history display, from the upper left cell of the second area 140B to the right, the first jackpot effect symbol “7 (red)”, the second jackpot effect symbol “7 pole”, and the third time The jackpot effect symbol “7 poles”, the fourth jackpot effect symbol “B”, and the current jackpot effect symbol “7 poles” (see FIG. 100-2 (e)).

  Next, the case of the specific example 3 as shown in FIG. 92C is assumed. Specific Example 3 is different from Specific Example 1 in that 3 wins are won in the first performance mode B and a specific area winning is achieved. In this case, as in the case of the specific example 1, after the special game, the second production mode B is set and the production conditions are satisfied, so the production condition satisfaction count display is “1”. On the other hand, as the jackpot effect symbol history display, the first jackpot effect symbol “7 (red)” and the jackpot effect symbol “B” indicating the three jackpot wins in the second effect mode B are displayed. As described above, even if the game state and the effect mode are changed as a result, the effect condition satisfaction count and the jackpot effect symbol history may be different if the change trigger (special drawing lottery result) is different (see FIG. 100-3 (b)).

  Next, the case of the specific example 4 as shown in FIG. Specific example 4 is different in that the big win 3 win in the production mode A in the specific example 3 is the big win 2 win. In this case, in the production mode A, in the production mode B after winning the jackpot 2 first and winning a specific area, the production conditions are not yet satisfied. The jackpot effect symbol “☆” indicating “0” and the winning of the jackpot 2 in the effect mode A is displayed (see FIG. 100-3 (c)).

  Next, in the first production mode B, the big win 2 is won, and after the specific area winning, the second production mode B is achieved, but the second production mode B is triggered by the big hit 2 winning and satisfies the production conditions Therefore, the production condition satisfaction count indicated by the production condition satisfaction frequency display is “1”. On the other hand, as the jackpot effect symbol history display, the first jackpot effect symbol “☆” and the jackpot effect symbol “☆” indicating the two jackpot wins in the second effect mode B are displayed (FIG. 100-3 (d )).

  Next, the case of the specific example 5 as shown in FIG. In the effect mode C after first winning the jackpot 4 in the effect mode A and not winning the specific area, the effect condition satisfaction number display and the jackpot effect symbol history display are not executed (see FIG. 100-4 (a)). Here, since the production condition is not yet satisfied, the counter value of the production condition satisfaction number counter is “0”. In the jackpot production symbol data storage area, the jackpot production design “ The jackpot effect design data indicating “7 (blue)” is stored in the first storage unit.

  Next, in the first effect mode B after winning the jackpot 5 in the effect mode C and winning a specific area, the effect condition satisfaction number display and the jackpot effect symbol history display are executed. Here, since the production condition is not yet satisfied, the production condition satisfaction number indicated by the production condition satisfaction frequency display is “0”, and the jackpot production symbol history display shows the big win 4 wins in the previous production mode A. The jackpot effect symbol “7 (blue)” and the jackpot effect symbol “7 poles” indicating the winning of the jackpot 5 in the current effect mode B are displayed.

  In this way, since the display condition satisfaction count display is executed, the player can easily understand the number of extended games including pullback. Further, since the jackpot effect symbol history display is executed, the player can recognize the jackpot history related to the villa.

  In addition, if the winning mode is a jackpot 5, jackpot 1, jackpot 2, or jackpot 3, winning conditions are always satisfied in the changing stage related to the winning, but the mode in which the playing conditions are satisfied is limited to this. I can't. For example, if you win a jackpot 1, jackpot 2, or jackpot 3, you will not be able to perform a variation effect that satisfies the performance conditions in the variation effect related to the winner, but in the special game effect or ending effect related to the winner, It is also possible to perform a special game effect or an ending effect with contents satisfying the effect condition. For example, a predetermined confrontation effect is performed in a special game effect that is triggered by winning of jackpot 1, jackpot 2, or jackpot 3 in the rendering mode B, and it is possible to win by the confrontation effect. In this case, if the player defeats in a confrontation effect, 4 winning jackpots can be confirmed.

  In the present embodiment, a specific effect is executed in the effect mode B. However, the execution time of the specific effect is not limited to this, and the change effect in the effect mode A, the effect mode C and / or the effect mode D or It can also be a special game effect or an ending effect.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 to 72, the production mode of the production that is a notification of winning of jackpot 1, jackpot 2, jackpot 3 and jackpot 5 is different depending on the production mode. It may be the same regardless of the mode, or some rendering modes may be common. For example, in the production mode B and the production mode C, winning in the confrontation production or notifying the winning of the jackpot 1, jackpot 2, jackpot 3 and jackpot 5 by the winning production, the success in a predetermined mission in the production modes A, C and E Thus, it is possible to satisfy the performance condition by notifying the winning of 1, 1, 2, 3, and 5 winning jackpots.

  In addition, the jackpot effect symbol history display shows the jackpot effect symbol for all the jackpot winning symbols related to the renso, but the display target can be limited to a specific jackpot. For example, the jackpot effect design may be displayed only when the jackpot 1, jackpot 2, jackpot 3 and jackpot 5 that are relatively advantageous for the game profit given to the player are won. The jackpot effect symbol is associated with the effect mode and the jackpot type, but may be associated with only the jackpot type.

(Piroko chance production)
Next, the effects performed in the first round game and the small hit game of the second jackpot game will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94.

  First, the second jackpot game and the jackpot game will be described. In the second jackpot game, an opening of 10 seconds is executed with the start of the second jackpot game. The first round game is started with the end of the opening. In the first round game, first, the first grand prize opening 8 is opened once for 0.2 seconds, and thereafter, the first grand prize opening 8 is set to 0. 0 with an interval (closed) of 3.0 seconds. Opening is continuously performed 3 times intermittently for 2 seconds. The interval between each opening in the 0.2 second opening of the first first prize opening 8 performed three times in succession is 1.0 second. Then, after the third 0.2 second opening, the first big prize opening 8 is opened for 29 seconds with an interval of 3.0 seconds.

  Thereafter, in the second round game to the 14th round game of the second jackpot game, the 29.5 second opening of the first grand prize opening 8 is performed, and in the 15th round game, the 29.5 of the second big prize opening 9 is performed. The second is released and the ending is performed.

  On the other hand, in the small hit game, an opening of 10 seconds is executed with the start of the small hit game. As soon as the opening is over, the first grand prize opening 8 is opened once for 0.2 seconds, and then the first grand prize opening 8 is closed for 0.2 seconds with an interval (closing) of 3.0 seconds. Opening is performed intermittently three times. The ending for 5.0 seconds is started 3 seconds after the last opening of the three consecutive first grand prize winning openings 8 is completed. The interval between each opening in the 0.2 second opening of the first first prize winning opening 8 that is continuously performed in the small hit game is 1.0 second.

  Thus, the opening / closing mode of the first grand prize winning port 8 before the 29 second opening of the first big winning port 8 in the first round game of the second big winning game and the opening / closing mode of the first big winning port 8 in the small hit game Is the same. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the second big hit game or the small hit game is being executed only by opening and closing the first big winning opening 8. Therefore, before the first big winning opening 8 in the first round game of the second big hit game is released for 29 seconds (hereinafter referred to as “AT long open”) and the small hit game, the same effects (hereinafter, By performing “common production”), the player is thrilled about whether the winner is the big hit 2 or the small win.

  Next, common effects will be described. The common effect is started after the stop display of the effect symbol suggesting the big win 2 winning or the small win winning shown in FIG. 101 (a) is executed. The common effect consists of an introduction effect and an AT long opening effect.

  In the common effect, the introduction effect is performed first. The introductory effect is an introductory part of the second big hit game and the small hit game, and is an effect that plays a guiding role in the second big hit game and the small hit game, and is performed first in the special game effect.

  Next to the introductory effect, the AT long opening effect is performed. The AT Long Opening Production is directed to the 29th opening of the first grand prize opening 8 in the first round game of the second jackpot game, and the first big winning opening 8 is released for 29 seconds (entering the game ball) This is an effect of trying to open the ball in an easy manner.

  Next, each effect which comprises a common effect is demonstrated. The introductory effect is performed at the opening of the second big hit game and the small hit game, and first, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), the titles associated with the small hit game before the AT long is released. In the present embodiment, a title image G51 indicating “Piroko chance” is displayed in the display area 140, and the voice of a specific character (specific character) associated with the second big hit game and the small hit game A guidance voice for the title (in the present embodiment, “Piroko chance”) is output from the voice output device 15.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), together with an image (explanation image) G52 for explaining the common effect, a launch instruction image G53 for instructing the launch of the game ball to the first big winning opening 8 is displayed in the display area 140. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, the explanation image G52 displays “Piroko BONUS plunge when the attacker opens for a long time”, and a large number of prize balls can be obtained when the first big prize opening 8 is opened for a long time when a game ball can easily enter. It is explained that a big jackpot game is finalized. Then, an image (specific character image) G54 representing the specific character is displayed in the display area 140, and a predetermined effect image G55 is displayed in a portion near the first big prize winning opening 8 in the display area 140.

  The AT long opening effect is performed before the opening of the AT long or before the ending of the small hit game after the opening is completed. In the present embodiment, the AT long opening effect is continuously executed three times.

  The first AT-long opening effect is performed when the first 0.2 second opening of the first grand prize opening 8 is performed (t1 in FIG. 93). The second AT-long opening effect is when the first opening of three consecutive 0.2 second opening of the first grand prize opening 8, that is, 0.2 second opening after the first 3 second interval is performed (see FIG. 93 at t2). The third AT-long opening effect is performed 2 seconds after the final opening of 3 consecutive 0.2-second opening of the first grand prize opening 8 (t3 in FIG. 93).

  In each AT long opening effect, as shown in FIG. 102A, the specific character image G54 emits a beam toward the predetermined effect image G55 in the display area 140, and the specific character from the audio output device 15 is displayed. Screaming with a voice saying "Ei!" The emitted beam collides with a predetermined effect image G55, but the effect image G55 can change in a predetermined manner when colliding. The effect of attempting to open the first grand prize opening 8 long is performed by the AT long opening effect by the beam firing, the shout, and the change of the effect image G55 and the first grand prize opening 8 being opened for 0.2 seconds. Will be broken.

  The third AT long opening effect is executed until just before the AT long opening or small hit game ending is performed. If the AT long release is performed (if it is the second jackpot game), the challenge succeeds indicating that the AT long release is performed when the AT long release is performed (t4 in FIG. 93 (a)). Production is performed. The challenge success effect is apparently executed without interruption from the third AT long opening effect, and as shown in FIG. 102 (b-1), the number of beams being emitted increases and the effect image G55 is enlarged. At the same time, an image G56 representing the title (Piroko BONUS) indicating the second jackpot game appears while being enlarged. In addition, in the successful challenge production, the increased beam and the enlarged effect image G55 disappear in that state, and the specific character image G54 has a predetermined action (this embodiment) as shown in FIG. 102 (c-1). Then, a piece is displayed with a smile) and the enlarged title image G56 is displayed to notify that the AT long release has been successful. Then, as shown in FIG. 102 (d-1), the game is switched to the Piroko bonus effect corresponding to the AT long release, and corresponds to the round game image G57 and the second jackpot game suggesting that the round game is being executed. A title image G58 is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the 29-second opening of the first big winning opening 8 is not executed (if it is a small hit game), when the ending is performed (t4 in FIG. 93B), FIG. As shown in (), a challenge failure effect is performed that suggests that AT long opening is not performed. In the challenge failure effect, the emitted beam and the effect image G55 disappear while being reduced.

  In the challenge failure effect, as shown in FIG. 102 (c-2), after notifying that the AT long release has failed due to the character image having a predetermined action (in this embodiment, it is disappointing in a disappointing state) As shown in FIG. 102 (d-2), the image is switched to the background image related to the effect mode D, the image G59 suggesting the specific character is displayed, and the effect symbol related to the small win is stopped.

  Moreover, in the AT long opening opening effect, it is an opportunity to increase the expectation level of AT long opening. Specifically, the expectation level of AT long opening in which the color of the effect image in the AT long opening turning effect changes. In the present embodiment, the standard color of the effect image is set to blue and can be changed to red, purple, and iridescent. The color change mode of the effect image is associated with the special game effect pattern of the second jackpot game and the special game effect pattern of the jackpot game. Furthermore, the degree of expectation for AT long opening varies depending on the color change mode of the effect image. Note that the degree of expectation of AT long opening suggested by the color of the effect image itself is higher in the order of blue <red <purple <rainbow.

  In this way, the first grand prize winning opening 8 is opened in such a manner that it is impossible to pass the game ball to the specific area 12, and after that, it is easy to allow the game ball to pass through the specific area 12 in the second big prize. The first big prize opening that is the same as the opening style of the first big prize opening 8 in a mode in which the second big hit game that the mouth 9 opens and the game ball in the second big hit game cannot pass through the specific area 12 Since the small hit game with the opening of 8 is performed, the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, when the first big winning opening 8 is opened for 0.2 seconds in the second big winning game and the small winning game, the AT big opening which attempts to open the first big winning opening 8 long is performed. Since the AT long opening effect is executed, the interest of the game can be improved.

  The common effects related to the AT long opening and the small hit game have been described above, but the special games related to the common effects are not limited to the AT long opening and the small hit game. That is, for example, in the first round game, first, the first grand prize opening 8 is continuously opened for 3.0 seconds 5 times intermittently, and then the second round with an interval of 5.0 seconds. It consists of a jackpot game in which the first big winning opening 8 is opened for 29 seconds after the round game is started, and five round games. Each round game has one first opening of the first big winning opening 8 for 3.0 seconds. A common performance can be applied to the jackpot game. In this case, common effects are performed in the opening and first round game of the former jackpot game and the opening and first to fifth round games of the latter jackpot game.

  In addition, the number of AT long opening beating effects performed in the common effect is one, and the jackpot game in which the AT long opening is performed by the AT long opening beating effect performed after the introduction effect and the common effect can be performed. Further, in the present embodiment, even if winning a small hit in the short time state, the common effect and the challenge failure effect are not performed, and the background image of the effect mode B or the effect mode C is not changed in appearance. Therefore, in the special game production performed in the jackpot two wins in the short-time state, the number of executions of the AT long opening strike effect is performed in the jackpot two-win in the non-short-time state in order to prevent annoyance in the state where the result is known. It can be reduced to 0 times or 1 time compared with the special game production city.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the time during which the beam is emitted, the time during which the shout “e!” Is emitted, and the time during which the effect image changes, that is, the AT long opening effect production time Are set as appropriate and can be set to the same value. The first time (for example, 1 second) <the second time (for example, 2 seconds) <the third time (for example, 3 seconds), and the order becomes later It can also be set differently to be longer.

(Specific chance production)
Next, the specific chance effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. The specific chance effect is a kind of notice effect (the rush effect for determining whether or not to enter the jackpot expectation effect) after which the execution of the jackpot expectation effect is expected. In the fluctuating effect, it is an effect that suggests the effect content of the jackpot expected effect that develops (expands) thereafter, and is performed in effect mode A, effect mode D, and effect mode E.

Here, before explaining the specific chance production in detail, the overall production for the big win or the small win in the variation production of the production mode A, the production mode D, and the production mode E which are the premise of the production of the specific chance. The development pattern (development pattern) will be described.
Note that the types of special figure change patterns that can be selected are the same in the normal period corresponding to the effect modes A and E and the third specific period corresponding to the effect mode D, and the effect mode A, effect mode D, and Since the types of variation effect patterns that can be selected in the effect mode E are also the same, the overall winning for the big win or the small win in the variation effects of the effect mode A, the effect mode D, and the effect mode E The production development patterns (development patterns) are common.

  There are two major development patterns for variable production. The first is reach, and then the development pattern is enhanced by the execution of a predetermined jackpot expectation. The second is reach. There is a development pattern in which a development effect, which is a kind of jackpot expectation effect, is performed without any success. Note that there is a case in which a stop display of an effect symbol showing a loss is suddenly performed without the establishment of a reach or development effect.

  In the present embodiment, “reach is established” includes a case where an effect design suggesting a special drawing lottery result (hereinafter referred to as “normal effect design”) is a temper, a left region, a center region, and a right region. In the area, a case where a special effect symbol different from the normal effect symbol is in a specific chance state in which it is temporarily stopped is included. The specific chance state occurs in the specific chance production.

  After reach is established, it develops into one of SP1 reach production, SP2 reach production, SPSP branch production, or development production. In addition, after the reach is established, there is a case where an effect symbol indicating a loss is displayed as it is without performing the jackpot expectation effect.

  The SP1 reach production and the SP2 reach production are SP reach production. The production contents of the SP1 reach production are different from the production contents of the SP2 reach production, and the SP2 reach production is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the SP1 reach production. In the present embodiment, the SP1 reach effect and the SP2 reach effect are executed after the reach is established.

  The development effect is an effect in which the content of the effect develops step by step, and the effect of increasing the jackpot expectation as the level increases, or the movable part 17B of the effect accessory device 17 moves in a specific manner. At the same time, the image display device 14 displays a specific image (for example, “Team B Participation” in FIGS. 123 (f) and 126 (e)). As shown in FIG. 95 (a), in this embodiment, the development effect is executed after the reach effect, after the SP1 reach effect, after the SP2 reach effect, and after the start of the variable effect without the reach effect.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (b), the SPSP branching effect is an effect performed before the SPSP reach effect, and it is determined which of the SPSP1 reach effect and the SPSP2 reach effect, which is the SPSP reach effect, is executed. This is an effect that increases the player's tension. As shown in FIG. 95 (a), in this embodiment, the SPSP branch effect is executed after the reach is established or after the development effect.

  Further, the content of the SPSP1 reach production is different from the content of the SPSP2 reach production, and the SPSP2 reach production is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the SPSP1 reach production (FIGS. 10, 11). 67-68 and "SPSP1" and "SPSP2" in the production contents of FIGS. 71-72).

  Next, the specific chance production will be described. The specific chance effect is executed in a variation effect based on a special diagram variation pattern having a special diagram variation time of 8 seconds or more (see FIGS. 67 to 68 and FIGS. 71 to 72).

  As shown in FIG. 96, the specific chance effect is a so-called step-up advance notice that is executed during the variable effect, that is, when the variable display of the effect symbol is being performed. Step 1 (“SU1” in FIG. 96) Starting from, the process proceeds to step 4 (“SU4” in FIG. 96). When the process progresses to step 4, the special effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the left area, the center area, and the right area of the display area 140.

  When the specific chance effect is started, first, as Step 1, the background image of the display area 140 is darkened (see FIG. 103). Then, an effect image (flame image) G61 representing flame is displayed in any one of the left region, the central region, and the right region of the display region 140, and the first predetermined image is displayed in the displayed region. A special effect symbol appears, and is replaced with any normal effect symbol that is variably displayed in the area where it appears (see FIG. 104).

  Next, as step 2 (“SU2” in FIG. 96), flame is displayed in any of the left region, the central region, and the right region of the display region 140 where the special effect design is not variably displayed. The effect image (flame image) G62 is displayed, the second predetermined special effect symbol appears in the displayed area, and is replaced with one of the normal effect symbols that are variably displayed in the appearing region. The change is displayed as it is (see FIG. 105).

  After step 1, not only in the case of developing to step 2 in this way, but also after step 1, the background image returns to the normal background image in effect mode A or effect mode C (darkness is canceled), There is a case where the stop display of the effect design shown is performed (see FIG. 106).

  After step 2, as step 3 (“SU3” in FIG. 96), an effect image (flame image) representing flames in the left region, the central region, and the region where the special effect design is not variably displayed in the right region. ) G63 is displayed, and the third predetermined special effect symbol appears in the displayed area, and is variably displayed as it is (see FIG. 107).

  After step 3, whether or not the special effect symbols are lowered while decelerating from the upper end of the display area 140 in a state where three special effects are aligned in a horizontal line, and whether or not to temporarily stop around the center, in other words, develop into step 4. Then, a specific chance state effect is performed to determine whether or not the specific chance state is established (see FIG. 108).

  If the development succeeds after the specific chance state intensifying effect, as step 4, the specific chance state to be expanded is established by temporarily stopping the three special effect symbols that appear in a horizontal line (see FIG. 108).

  On the other hand, if the development fails after the specific chance state intensifying effect, the special effect symbol that has descended while decelerating from the upper end is further lowered to the lower end of the display area 140 without temporarily stopping around the center. Then, the background image returns to the normal background image in the effect mode A or the effect mode C, and the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed (see FIG. 109).

  In step 4, the roulette effect indicating which special effect symbol is selected is performed by repeatedly illuminating the three special effect symbols that are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 110). The roulette effect is performed for a preset time. When the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the roulette effect, the operation of the effect button 18A becomes an effective operation valid period, and the operation of the effect button 18A is performed on the display area 140. An image G64 to be instructed (or urged) and an image G65 representing the operation effective period and the remaining time of the operation effective period are displayed (see FIG. 111A).

  When the operation of the effect button 18A for the effect button 18A in the roulette effect is reached, when the player operates the effect button 18A, the special effect symbol corresponding to the selection confirmation symbol determined in advance by the process of step S1309-9-6. The roulette (light) stops and the special effect design is selected and confirmed (see FIG. 111 (b)). Here, when the operation is not performed during the operation effective period, when the operation effective period ends, the roulette (light) is displayed with the special effect symbol corresponding to the selection confirmed symbol determined in advance by the process of step S1309-9-6. ) Stops, and the special performance symbol is selected and confirmed.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (a), in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of special effect designs are set, and an “x” symbol indicating that the jackpot expectation effect is not executed, and an execution of the SP reach effect is indicated “ “Oninokki” design, “Development” design suggesting execution of development effect, “Decisive Battle” design suggesting execution of SPSP branching effect, and “Death Fight” design suggesting execution of SPSP branching effect are provided. . Both the “decision battle” symbol and the “death battle” symbol suggest execution of the SPSP branch production, but the “death battle” symbol has a higher expectation of winning the jackpot. In other words, the “death battle” symbol is easier to execute the SPSP2 reach effect than the “decision battle” symbol.

  Therefore, when the special effect symbol is selected and confirmed by the roulette effect, the jackpot expectation effect indicated by the selected and confirmed special effect symbol is executed. Here, when the “x” symbol is selected and confirmed, first, the screen returns to the normal background image of the effect mode A or the effect mode C as shown in FIG. Next, if the special drawing lottery result relating to the specific chance effect is a loss, an effect symbol indicating a loss (lost effect symbol) is stopped. On the other hand, if the special drawing lottery result related to the specific chance effect is a jackpot, an effect symbol indicating the jackpot winning (a jackpot effect symbol) is stopped (so-called a resurrection effect is performed).

  The production mode of the specific chance production is not limited to the present embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of special effect symbols to be temporarily stopped can be set to one or a plurality instead of three, and even if there is only one type, the number can be set according to the variable effect pattern. it can. In the present embodiment, the specific chance effect is executed immediately after the start of the variable effect, and the specific chance state is provided in parallel with the reach state, but the specific chance effect is executed after the reach state is established. It can also be done. Further, the reach state can be established after a predetermined jackpot expectation effect is executed after the specific chance state is established. That is, the specific chance state can be executed in series with the reach state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the SP reach 1 effect, the development effect, and the SPSP are developed without passing through the specific chance state when the SP reach 1 effect, the development effect, and the SPSP branch effect are developed via the specific chance state. The jackpot expectation is set to be higher than when it is developed into a branch effect. However, when the SP reach 1 production, the development production, and the SPSP branch production are developed without going through the specific chance state, the SP reach 1 production, the development production, and the SPSP branch production are developed through the specific chance state. It is also possible to set so that the jackpot expectation is higher.

  In this way, in the variation display of the effect design, the special effect design that suggests the type of effect that develops after that is temporarily stopped, and when the special effect design is confirmed, the type of effect suggested by the special effect design is displayed. Since it is executed, the interest of the game is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal period according to the production mode A and the production mode E is different from the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the third specific period according to the production mode D. It is different in that the appearance rate of the special figure fluctuation time indicated by the special figure fluctuation pattern is different. Specifically, in the third specific period, the appearance rate of normal reach (special pattern fluctuation pattern “03”) in the loss with reach (special figure stop data = 18) is different from that in the normal period. The appearance rate of the patterns “04” to “07”) is larger. That is, in the effect mode D related to the third specific period, when the jackpot expectation effect such as the SP reach effect is executed in the variable effect as compared with the effect mode A related to the normal period, the expectation of the jackpot winning may be expected. it can. Note that the normal period related to the effect mode A and the special figure variation pattern determination table related to the third specific period related to the effect mode D can be made common.

(First special notice effect)
Next, the first special notice effect will be described. As described above, the first special notice effect is an effect for the execution of the high expectation effect, and at least a pseudo for the inrush effect that becomes a branch point of whether or not the high expectation effect is executed. Includes continuous effects and count lock effects. When the high expectation effect is executed after the pseudo rendition effect is executed, the inrush effect that develops from the pseudo ream effect and leads to the high expectation effect is executed, and this inrush effect is also included in the first special notice effect. It is.

(Pseudo-continuous production)
First, the pseudo-continuous production will be described. The pseudo-continuous effect is a notice effect in which a re-variation effect that is re-variable after a temporary stop in a mode (see FIGS. 65 and 66) in which the effect symbol that is variably displayed shows a loss is executed a plurality of times. Here, the above-described pseudo continuous level is associated with the pseudo continuous effect. In the present embodiment, the pseudo continuous level is set in five stages of pseudo continuous level 1 to pseudo continuous level 5.

  The pseudo-continuous level is associated with an effect mode of pseudo-continuous production. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 97 (a), in the pseudo-ream level 1, a normal standard design effect symbol in the effect mode B (hereinafter referred to as “effect mode B normal symbol”) is used. The pseudo fluctuation time, which is the time from the start of fluctuation to the temporary stop, is the same time as the special figure fluctuation time related to the non-reach loss when the special figure holding number (U1 or U2) is 2 to 3 in the production mode B (this implementation In the embodiment, the temporary stop time, which is a temporary stop time, is set to the same time as the special figure stop time in the rendering mode B (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment). ing. Further, in the variation display of the effect symbol related to the pseudo continuous level 1, there are three effect symbols (left symbol) in the left area of the display region 140, effect symbol (middle symbol) in the central area, and effect symbol (right symbol) in the right area. It is scrolled from top to bottom in a state of being aligned side by side.

  The pseudo-ream level 2 is different from the pseudo-ream level 1 in that an effect design having a design different from the effect mode B normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “effect mode B awakening symbol”) is used. In addition, the variation display mode, the pseudo variation time (second pseudo variation time) and the temporary stop time (second temporary stop time) of the effect symbol related to the pseudo continuous level 2 are set to be the same as those in the pseudo continuous level 1. Yes.

  In the pseudo-ream level 3, the variation display mode of the effect symbols is different from that in the pseudo-ream level 2. Specifically, the temporarily stopped production mode B awakening symbol is cut in the horizontal direction (horizontal), and each of the cut production mode B awakening symbols moves up and down and disappears to become a dark screen. From the center of the display area 140, the next left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol suggesting a reduced loss are aligned in a horizontal fashion. The pseudo variation time (third pseudo variation time) and the temporary stop time (third temporary stop time) of the pseudo continuous level 3 are set to be the same as the second pseudo variation time and the second temporary stop time. The design of the pseudo-ream level 3 effect design is also set to be the same as that of the pseudo-ream level 2.

  The pseudo-continuous level 4 is different from the case of the pseudo-continuous level 3 in the variation display mode of the effect symbol, the pseudo-variable time, and the temporary stop time. Specifically, the pseudo variation level 4 (pseudo variation time) of the pseudo continuous level 4 is set to a time shorter than the third pseudo variation time (in this embodiment, 0.7 seconds). The temporary stop time (fourth temporary stop time) is also set to be shorter than the third temporary stop time (0.3 seconds in this embodiment). In addition, in the variation display of the effect symbol related to the pseudo continuous level 4, the temporarily stopped effect mode B awakening symbol is cut in the vertical direction (vertical), and the cut effect mode B awakening symbol is moved in the left-right direction as it is. Then, after disappearing and becoming a dark screen, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol suggesting reduced loss are arranged side by side so as to jump out from the center of the display area 140. It will expand. The design of the effect design is set to be the same as in the case of pseudo-ream level 3.

  The pseudo-continuous level 5 is different from the case of the pseudo-continuous level 4 in the variation display mode of the effect symbol, the pseudo-variable time, and the temporary stop time. Specifically, the pseudo-variation level 5 (pseudo-variation time) is set to a time shorter than the fourth pseudo-variation time (0.4 seconds in the present embodiment). The temporary stop time (fifth temporary stop time) is set to be shorter than the fourth temporary stop time (in this embodiment, 0.1 second). In addition, in the variation display of the effect symbol related to the pseudo ream level 5, the temporarily stopped effect mode B awakening symbol is cut in the diagonally right direction, and the cut effect mode B awakening symbol moves in the lower left and upper right directions. When the screen disappears and becomes a dark screen, the left design, middle design and right design suggesting reduced loss are aligned side by side, and the screen is expanded so that it pops out from the center of the display area 140. Come on. The design of the effect design is set to be the same as in the case of the pseudo-ream level 4.

  As described above, in the pseudo-continuous production, the pseudo-continuous level associated with the production mode changes (steps up), but the mode is various. Specifically, the initial value of the pseudo continuous level set when the pseudo continuous effect is started is set to any one of the pseudo continuous level 1 to the pseudo continuous level 5. Further, when the pseudo continuous level changes, the level increases by one or a plurality of stages.

  For example, a pattern that is first set to quasi-continuation level 1 and then changes from quasi-continuation level 2 to quasi-continuation level 3 to quasi-continuation level 4 and finally rises to quasi-continuation level 5 Next, the pseudo-continuous level 4 is set, and the change of the pseudo-continuous level is a pattern in which the first special notice effect ends, or the pseudo-continuous level 3 is set first, and then the pseudo-continuous level does not change. There is a pattern in which the first special notice effect ends.

  The final pseudo-ream level corresponds to the determination result of the pseudo-ream level determination. In addition, when the pseudo continuous level of the pseudo continuous effect is the pseudo continuous level 1 to the pseudo continuous level 4, when the rush effect is executed next to the pseudo continuous effect, the rush effect is not executed and the first special notice effect is performed. May end. On the other hand, when the pseudo continuous level of the pseudo continuous effect is the pseudo continuous level 5, the inrush effect is always executed. That is, when the pseudo continuous level rises to the pseudo continuous level 5, the execution of the rush effect is confirmed.

  In the present embodiment, the pseudo continuous level is set so as not to change downward. Although it is for suppressing the fall of the production effect by what is called fall, it can also set so that fall may generate | occur | produce. In the case of failure, on the contrary, it is possible to set so that the expected degree of execution of the rush effect (expected degree of jackpot) is increased.

  By the way, in the quasi-continuous production, the time required for the presentation symbol unit display to be one set (cycle) from the start of the variation display of the production symbol to the temporary stop (including the re-variation from the temporary stop) is the quasi-continuous production. Level 1 to pseudo-continuous level 3 is “2.0 seconds (variation is 1.5 seconds, temporary stop is 0.5 seconds)”, and pseudo-continuous level 4 is “1.0 seconds (variation is 0.7 seconds, temporary "Stop is 0.3 seconds)", and "5 seconds (variation is 0.4 seconds, temporary stop is 0.1 seconds)" in the pseudo-continuous level 5. In the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous production proceeds with 2.0 seconds as one block. That is, in the pseudo-continuous level 1 to the pseudo-continuous level 3, the effect symbol unit display is executed once in one set, in the pseudo-ream level 4, the effect symbol unit display is executed twice in one set. The effect symbol unit display is executed four times in one set.

(Count lock production)
Next, the count lock effect will be described. The count lock effect is an effect in which the number of remaining effect modes in the effect mode remaining number display is maintained (does not change) when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. Specifically, the update of the remaining number of effects mode represented by the display of the remaining number of effects mode is locked (restricted), suggesting that the remaining number of effects mode is not updated. In other words, the remaining number of effects mode is “1”. This effect restricts subtraction.

  Here, the effect mode remaining number display which is a premise of the count lock effect will be described. The effect mode remaining number display is an effect of displaying the effect mode remaining number image G73 representing the remaining number of effect modes in the third area 140C of the display area 140. 113 (a) and 113 (c) show the stop display of the effect symbols, and FIGS. 113 (b) and 113 (d) show the change display of the effect symbols of FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (c). It is.

  As shown in FIG. 113, when the effect symbol variation display is ended and the effect symbol stop display is started (see FIG. 113C), the effect mode remaining number indicated by the effect mode remaining number display is “1”. "Subtracted and updated. This means that the number of special figure fluctuation displays that can be executed in the production mode B has decreased by one. Thus, the remaining number of effects mode can be confirmed by displaying the remaining effects mode.

  In the count lock effect, the lock level is set in the same manner as the pseudo continuous effect. The lock level is associated with the effect mode of the count lock effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114 (a), in the count lock effect at the lock level 1, the design of the effect mode remaining count image G73 is displayed as it is without being changed. That is, the effect mode remaining number-of-times image G73 is positioned as an image in the normal mode that represents the remaining number of effect mode remaining times.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), in the count lock effect at the lock level 2, the first special mode effect mode remaining number image G81 having a different design from the effect mode remaining number image G73 is used. The first special mode effect mode remaining number-of-times image G81 has a design in which a chain is wrapped around a portion indicating the remaining number of effect modes related to the effect mode remaining number-of-times image G73, and the letters “HOLD” are attached.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (c), in the count lock effect at the lock level 3, the second special mode effect mode having a different design from the effect mode remaining number-of-times image G73 and the first special mode effect mode remaining number-of-times image G81. The remaining number of times image G82 is used. The second special mode effect mode remaining number-of-times image G82 has a design in which a tentacle is wrapped around a portion indicating the remaining number of effect modes related to the effect mode remaining number-of-times image G73, and a letter “HOLD” is added.

  Thus, in the count lock effect, the lock level associated with the effect mode changes (steps up), but the mode is various. Specifically, the initial value of the lock level that is set when the count lock effect is started is set to any one of lock level 1 to lock level 3. Further, when the lock level changes, it rises by one or more steps (see FIG. 97 (b)). Further, even once the lock level 2 (first special mode) is reached, the lock level 1 may be released and the first special mode may be released to return to the normal mode.

  For example, a pattern that is first set to lock level 1 and then changes from lock level 2 to lock level 3, a pattern that is first set to lock level 1 and then changes to lock level 3, first lock level 2 Is set, and then the count lock effect is terminated without changing the lock level. The final lock level corresponds to the determination result of the count lock level determination (see FIG. 97 (b)).

  In the present embodiment, the lock level is set so that no downward change occurs. Although it is for suppressing the fall of the production effect by what is called fall, it can also set so that fall may generate | occur | produce. In the case of failure, on the contrary, it is possible to set so that the expected degree of execution of the rush effect (expected degree of jackpot) is increased.

  As described above, the count lock effect is executed in various modes. Here, specific examples of the count lock effect will be described.

  115 shows a state in which a count lock effect at a lock level 1 is executed, FIG. 116 shows a state in which a count lock effect at a lock level 2 is being executed, and FIG. 116 shows a count lock effect at a lock level 3 being executed. Each state is shown. In addition, in FIGS. 115 to 117, the change display of the effect symbol (FIG. 115 (a), FIG. 116 (a), FIG. 117 (a)) → the temporary stop of the effect symbol (FIG. 115 (b), FIG. 116 ( b), FIG. 117 (b)) → Change display of effect symbol (FIG. 115 (c), FIG. 116 (c), FIG. 117 (c)) → Temporary stop of effect symbol (FIG. 115 (d), FIG. d) and FIG. 117 (d)) are also sequentially performed. As shown in FIGS. 115 to 117, even if the pseudo-continuous effect is executed while the count lock effect is being executed, the effect mode remaining number indicated by the effect mode remaining number display does not change. Here, the change display and temporary stop of the effect symbols are performed according to any one of the pseudo continuous level 1 to the pseudo continuous level 5.

  In the count lock effect, the effect mode remaining number of times images G73, G81, and G82 are repeatedly expanded and contracted a plurality of times like the movement of the heart while the effect symbol variation display is being performed (hereinafter, referred to as the heart motion). The expansion / reduction of the effect mode remaining times images G73, G81, and G82 is referred to as “first emphasis display”). And when temporary stop of an effect design is started, the 1st highlight display will be ended according to the start. While the effect symbol is temporarily stopped, the effect mode remaining number of times images G73, G81, and G82 are stopped, and the first emphasis display is resumed as the effect symbol is re-varied. In this way, the first emphasis display by expansion / reduction of the effect mode remaining times images G73, G81, and G82 causes the player to pay attention to the remaining number of the effect modes and forcibly cancels the restriction on the update of the effect mode remaining times. It creates a state of trying to make it (creates an atmosphere).

  In addition, the lock level changes with various circumstances, but when the lock level increases, in other words, when the special mode is established, the lock level is always transmitted. The lock squeak effect is an effect that dictates whether or not the lock level rises (whether or not a special mode (hold) is established), and a first lock squeak effect that dictates whether or not the lock level rises. This is composed of a second lock squealing effect that determines whether or not the lock level is increased to 3.

  Here, the rocking effect will be described. FIG. 118 shows a state in which the first lock squeezing effect is executed and raised to the lock level 2, and a state in which the first lock squeaking effect is executed but cannot be raised to the lock level 2. FIG. 119 shows a state in which the second lock-rolling effect is executed and raised to the lock level 3, and a state where the second lock-rolling effect is executed but cannot be raised to the lock level 3.

  Both the first lock effect and the second lock effect are started with the start (redisplay) of the change display of the effect symbol. Specifically, the effect mode remaining number of times image G73 displayed in the third region 140C moves while being enlarged to the center of the display region 140 (hereinafter, the effect mode remaining number of times images G73, G81, and G82 are enlarged and moved). (Referred to as “second highlighting”), and an image (chain image) G83 representing a chain related to lock level 2 or an image (tentacle image) G84 representing a tentacle related to lock level 3 to the moved effect mode remaining number image G73. Appears and moves in a state where the surface is rolled to wrap around the expanded effect mode remaining number of times image G73 (FIGS. 118 (b) and 119 (b)).

  Here, when the lock level increases, as shown in FIG. 118 (c-1) or 119 (c-1), the chain image G83 or the tentacle image that has been moved due to the temporary stop of the effect symbol. G84 is stopped (moving is completed), the winding of the effect mode remaining number of times image G73 is completed, and character images G85 and G86 of “HOLD” are displayed below the effect mode remaining number of times image G73. The special mode effect mode remaining number of times image G81 or the second special mode effect mode remaining number of times image G82 is completed, and the increase in the lock level is confirmed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 118 (d-1) or 119 (d-1), the first special mode effect mode remaining number image displayed in the center of the display area 140 during the temporary stop of the effect symbol. G81 or the second special mode effect mode remaining number of times image G82 moves while being reduced to the third region 140C.

  On the other hand, when the lock level does not increase, that is, when the lock level is maintained, as shown in FIG. 118 (c-2) or 119 (c-2), the movement is accompanied by a temporary stop of the effect symbol. The chain image G83 or the tentacle image G84 that has been moved away from the effect mode remaining number-of-times image G73, and the wrapping around the effect mode remaining number-of-times image G73 fails.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 118 (d-2) or 119 (d-2), the effect mode remaining number-of-times image G73 displayed in the center of the display area 140 is temporarily displayed during the temporary stop of the effect symbol. Move while shrinking to area 140C.

  As described above, since the first lock accentuation effect or the second lock accentuation effect is performed when the change display of the effect symbol is performed, when the first lock accentuation effect or the second lock accentuation effect is executed, The first highlight that constitutes the count lock effect is not performed. That is, the first emphasis display and the first lock accent effect or the second lock accent effect are selectively executed.

(Inrush production)
Next, the rush effect will be described with reference to FIG. The rush effect is always executed regardless of the pseudo-continuous level determined for the variation effect when the high expectation effect is performed in the variation effect in which the first special notice effect is performed. In addition, when the first special notice effect is executed with the change effect of the special figure change pattern with no reach or the reach with normal reach, the inrush effect is not executed.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (a), when the temporary stop of the effect design is performed, the effect design is torn apart from the background image and the effect design and the background image divided by the torn parts, Along the torn part, it gradually shifts in opposite directions (see FIG. 120 (b)). This state of being cut and shifted is set as an introduction effect of whether or not a high expectation introduction effect that is led to a high expectation effect is executed. At this time, another background image (gray portion in FIG. 120 (b)) is displayed in the cut portion (the gap between the effect pattern and the background image cut and divided).

  When the high expectation introduction effect is executed, the high expectation introduction effect is executed after the introduction effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120 (c-1), the shifted design pattern and background image disappear from the display area 140, and the display area 140 is darkened when the other background image is exposed. . Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (d-1), a predetermined high expectation degree effect is executed.

  On the other hand, when the high expectation introduction effect is not executed, as shown in FIG. 120 (c-2), the effect symbol that has been temporarily stopped is completely returned to the state before the shifted effect symbol and the background image are cut. And the next variation effect is started as shown in FIG. 120 (d-2). Since the next variation effect is started, the effect mode remaining number indicated by the effect mode remaining number of times image G73 is updated and “1” is subtracted (see FIGS. 120 (c-2) and 120 (d-2)). ).

  As described above, at the end of the high expectation degree introduction effect shown in FIG. 120 (c-1), or immediately before the stop display of the effect symbol shown in FIG. 120 (c-2) is performed (the shifted effect symbol and background image). ) Is the end point of the rush effect, that is, the end time of the first special notice effect. Further, the effect mode remaining number images G73, G81, G82 are not displayed in the rush effect and the high expectation effect (the effect mode remaining number display is not executed in the rush effect and the high expectation effect), that is, It is once erased with the execution of the rush effect (the display of the remaining number of effects mode is interrupted (temporarily ended) with the execution of the rush effect). In addition, the non-displayed effect mode remaining number images G73, G81, and G82 are redisplayed with execution of the stop display of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation effect (the effect mode remaining number display is a stop display of the effect symbol). Will be re-executed with the execution of. Re-execution of the effect mode remaining number display is performed by the effect mode remaining number image G73 of the normal mode, and indicates the remaining number of effect modes before non-display during the stop display of the effect symbol related to the re-execution. Is desirable.

  Next, the first special notice effect will be described. First, the first special notice effect scenario, which is the contents of the first special notice effect, will be described. The first special notice effect scenario includes the connection location, the pseudo-continuous level, the timing at which the pseudo-continuous level is UP (pseudo-continuous UP timing), the number of stages at which the pseudo-continuous level is UP at the pseudo continuous UP timing, the lock level, and the lock level. UP timing (lock level UP timing), the number of stages when the lock level is UP at the lock level UP timing, the timing to execute the lock squeak effect (lock squeak effect timing), and the lock squeak effect to be performed at the lock squeak effect timing It consists of types.

  The first special notice effect scenario is associated with the effect content of the change effect. In other words, the connection location, the pseudo-continuous UP timing, the lock level UP timing, and the lock rolling effect timing are associated (synchronized) with a predetermined event (effect state) on the effect in the change effect. The predetermined event on the effect is appropriately set according to the specific effect content (the change effect pattern) of the change effect in which the first special notice effect is performed. In the present embodiment, as a predetermined event on the production related to the first special notice production, when an enemy character appears in a confrontation production with a high expectation degree of jackpot, an ally character selects an attack technique to the enemy character in the confrontation production At the time of the decision effect that will be a notification of the jackpot winning, after the determined effect and before the stop display of the effect symbol that suggests the jackpot winning, the title display of the jackpot game that will be notified of the jackpot winning is set appropriately (See FIG. 69).

  In addition, the timing at which a predetermined event on these effects occurs is associated with the above-described 2-second block. More specifically, the time axis after the start of the changing effect is assigned so that 2 seconds is a unit time, and an event on the effect is set to occur at any of the assigned timings.

  In the present embodiment, all the timings at which the predetermined event on the production occurs are associated with the special figure fluctuation production pattern caused by the fluctuation production pattern. And, as described above, the connection location is determined based on the special figure variation pattern, but since the connection location constitutes the end of the first special notice effect, determining the connection location This means that the total number of 2-second blocks in the first special notice effect is determined (see FIG. 78 (a)).

  In the first special notice effect scenario determination in step S1309-11-15, the sub CPU 102a checks the total number of 2-second blocks corresponding to the connection location determined in the connection location determination in step S1309-11-8, and finally. Pseudo-continuous UP timing and lock-up effect so that the pseudo-continuous level determined in the pseudo-continuous level determination in step S1309-11-11 and the lock level determined in the lock level determination in step S1309-11-13 The order of the 2-second block corresponding to the timing, the number of stages in which the pseudo-continuous level is UP in the order of the 2-second block, the number of stages in which the lock level is UP, and the type of the rocking effect are determined. By determining in this way, the first special notice effect scenario of various patterns is determined (see FIG. 97 (c)).

  The first special notice effect control command corresponding to the first special notice effect scenario determined in this way is set in the transmission buffer in step S1309-11-16, and the set first special notice effect control command is in step S1700. It is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the output process.

  When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the first special notice effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 perform the first special notice effect indicated by the command from the start of the change effect to the connection location, and change from the connection location. A variation effect of the content indicated by the effect control command is performed from a location corresponding to the connection location.

  As described above, in the effect mode B, the effect mode remaining number display is locked (restricted), and the effect mode remaining number is not updated, in other words, the effect mode remaining number is restricted from being subtracted by “1”. Since the count lock effect is executed, the effect of the effect is improved. Further, since the count lock effect is executed during the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect of the effect is further improved.

  In addition, while the pseudo-continuous effect with temporary stop / re-variation of the effect symbol is being executed, the variation display of the effect symbol related to the pseudo-continuous effect is performed while the remaining number of the effect mode being displayed is held (locked). (In a broad sense, the first emphasis display that expands / shrinks along with the effect symbol unit display) and the emphasis display constituted by the second emphasis display in which the effect mode remaining number of times image G73 expands / moves in the lock-up effect. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the remaining number of the production modes, so that the production effect of the count lock production is improved.

  In addition, a plurality of performance modes (lock levels) of the count lock effect are set (normal mode, first special mode, and second special mode), and the jackpot expectation varies depending on the performance mode, so the effect of the performance is improved. (See FIG. 79). In the present embodiment, the degree of jackpot expectation based on the effect mode of the count lock effect is higher in the order of second special mode> first special mode> normal mode.

  Also, the effect of the effect is improved since the degree of jackpot expectation is different between when the first special notice effect including the count lock effect is executed and when it is not executed (see FIG. 77). In the present embodiment, the expectation of jackpot is higher when the first special notice effect is executed than when it is not executed. It is also possible to make the jackpot expectation higher than when the first special notice effect is not executed.

  Further, when the first special notice effect including the count lock effect is executed, there is a case where a big win is won or a case where the player loses. That is, the first special notice effect including the count lock effect includes a so-called gasse. Therefore, the player's feeling of tension is enhanced, and the effect of production is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the display of the remaining number of effects mode related to the count lock effect first indicates the number of execution times (Ma) that can be performed in the effect mode, from which “1” is subtracted with the execution of the variable display of symbols. However, it is also possible to display “0” first, and then add “1” and update it with the execution of the symbol variation display. That is, as long as the player can recognize the remaining number of effects mode, the mode of displaying the remaining effects mode is not limited. Further, the display of the number of remaining effects mode can be performed using a display device different from the image display device 14.

  In the present embodiment, the first special notice effect including the count lock effect and the count lock effect is performed in the effect mode B, but the effect mode can be executed like the effect mode C and the effect mode D. It is also possible to perform in other production modes where the number of times is provided. In addition, the effect mode in which the first special notice effect is executed can be executed in an effect mode that is provided with the number of times that the effect mode can be executed but is not associated with the gaming state. For example, the first special advance notice effect is performed based on the prior determination result during a predetermined period from when the determination information related to the prior determination result is stored until the special symbol corresponding to the determination information is stopped. It can be executed in the production mode (so-called “look-ahead zone”). In addition, a predetermined timing means (for example, RTC: Real Time Clock) is mounted on the effect control board 102, and the first special notice effect is executed in the effect mode that occurs when the predetermined time is reached by the RTC time measurement. You can also.

  Further, the production mode of the count lock production is not limited to the present embodiment. For example, the timing of non-display and re-display of the effect mode remaining count images G73, G81, and G82 is not limited to the execution of the rush effect and the stop display of the effect symbol as described above, and may be other timings. Furthermore, the effect mode remaining count images G73, G81, and G82 can be continuously displayed in the rush effect and the high expectation effect. Further, the effect mode of the first highlight display and the second highlight display is not limited to the present embodiment, and the effect mode remaining number of times images G73, G81, and G82 are entirely or partially related (for example, the effect mode remaining number of times). Designs such as colors and patterns of blinking and predetermined portions of the production mode remaining number of times images G73, G81, G82 (for example, the number portion relating to the remaining number of production mode and the circle portion under the number) Can also be changed.

  Further, at the lock level 1 of the count lock effect, the effect mode remaining number of times image G73 in the normal mode is expanded / reduced when the effect symbol variation display is performed, but instead of this, In addition, when the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the effect mode remaining number-of-times image G73 can be maintained in the normal mode without being changed due to expansion or reduction. When the change in the effect mode remaining number image G73 is performed separately from the lock level 1 in the present embodiment, the change in the effect mode remaining number image G73 is set to the lock level 1 (normal mode), and the normal mode effect The expansion / reduction of the mode remaining number of times image G73 is set to the lock level 2, and the lock levels 2 and 3 in the present embodiment are set to the lock levels 3 and 4, respectively. In this case, the display of the effect mode remaining number of times image G73 and the pseudo-continuous effect in the normal mode according to the lock level 1 can be used as a count lock effect indicating that the effect mode remaining number is not updated.

  Further, the effect mode of the first special notice effect is not limited to the present embodiment. For example, the final level of the pseudo continuous level of the pseudo continuous effect and the lock level of the count lock effect is not limited to the present embodiment, and may be set as appropriate, such as “2” depending on the height and other plural levels. Further, it is possible to prevent the pseudo continuous level and the lock level from being provided in the pseudo continuous effect and the count lock effect. Furthermore, the first special notice effect is also performed by a production device other than the image display device 14 such as the audio output device 15, the production lighting device 16, the production effect device 17, and the production button device 18. Depending on the level and the lock level, it is possible to increase the number of types of effect devices that perform images.

  Further, in this embodiment, the count lock effect is performed in a pseudo-continuous effect in one variation effect, but can be performed over a plurality of variation effects. In this case, on the condition that the variation effect before the variation effect subject to the count lock effect is executed without reach, the change effect and the count lock effect related to the previous reachless loss are determined based on the prior determination result. The count lock effect can be performed in the target variation effect. Furthermore, in this case, it is possible to execute or not execute the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable effect related to the lossless reach.

  In this embodiment, when a high expectation effect is executed after a pseudo-continuous effect is executed, an inrush effect is always executed between the pseudo-continuous effect and the high expectation effect. It is also possible to execute the high expectation degree effect without executing the rush effect after the continuous effect is executed. In this case, it is possible to cause the reach state to occur in the temporary stop of the last effect symbol related to the pseudo-continuous effect. In addition, in the temporary stop of the last effect symbol related to the pseudo-continuous effect, it is possible to temporarily stop the effect symbol that suggests the effect content of the high expectation effect that is executed (developed) afterwards instead of the reach state. The temporary stop of the production symbol that suggests the content of the production of this high expectation production is the production content of the high expectation production by using a special production symbol that is not used in the stop display of the production symbol that suggests the result of the special symbol lottery Can be suggested. Further, using the effect symbols (see FIGS. 65 and 66) used in the stop display of the effect symbols that suggest the result of the special symbol lottery, the expectation degree is high in the arrangement (combination) of effect symbols at the time of the temporary stop. It is also possible to suggest the content of the production.

(Second special notice effect)
Next, the second special notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. The second special notice effect is a kind of notice effect indicating the degree of expectation of jackpot of the change effect, and is performed in the effect mode E. In the present embodiment, in the second special notice effect, the image G54 of a specific character is displayed in the display area 140, and the image G64 instructing (or prompting) the operation of the effect button 18A, the operation effective period, and the operation An image G65 representing the remaining time of the valid period is displayed, and then the dialogue image G60 is displayed by pressing the effect button 18A. A plurality of types of the serif image G60 are set, and the type of the serif image G60 indicates the degree of expectation for jackpot.

  Here, before describing the second special notice effect in detail, an effect mode E that is an effect mode in which the second special notice effect is performed will be described with reference to FIG.

First, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), in the effect mode A (low probability game state and non-short-time game state), when winning the jackpot 3 and winning a specific area, the effect mode B (high probability game state and time-short game) Status). In the production mode B (high probability gaming state and short-time gaming state), if the special figure change is executed 100 times without winning a jackpot, the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state is terminated for the gaming state. While the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state are set, the rendering mode E is set for the rendering mode. In the effect mode E, it is determined whether or not the effect mode E ends (so-called falling lottery) every time the special figure variation display ends (step S1313-16). When it is determined that the production mode E is finished, the production mode A is set.
As will be described in detail later, the second look-ahead effect is performed when the effect mode B, which is the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, ends.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), in the effect mode A (low probability game state and non-short-time game state), when winning the jackpot 1 and winning a specific area, the effect mode B (high probability game state and time-short game) Status). In the production mode B (high probability gaming state and short-time gaming state), if the special figure change is executed 100 times without winning a jackpot, the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state is terminated for the gaming state. While the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state are set, the production mode is set to the production mode A (low-probability gaming state and the non-time-short gaming state) without being set to the production mode E.
Although not shown in the figure, when the jackpot 2 and jackpot 5 are won, the transition to the production mode is the same as when the jackpot 1 is won.

  In this way, when the jackpot related to the production mode B is jackpot 1, jackpot 2, or jackpot 3 where the profit to the player is smaller than the jackpot 5, the presentation mode E ends when the presentation mode B ends. Set to On the other hand, when the jackpot related to the production mode B is a big jackpot 1, jackpot 2 or jackpot 5 that has a larger profit to the player than the jackpot 3, when the presentation mode B ends, the production mode E is set. The production mode A is set without being performed.

  Next, a specific example of the second special notice effect will be described. In the effect mode E, as shown in FIG. 49, it is determined whether or not the second special notice effect is executed based on the second special notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. Step S1309-13-4).

  When it is determined that the second special notice effect is to be executed, the second special notice effect TZ1 to TZ3 starts to be displayed (see FIG. 121 (a)), and after the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, after 1 second), the second special notice effect is performed. A notice effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121 (b), the specific character image G54 is displayed, and an operation valid period (for example, 3 seconds) in which the operation of the effect button 18A is effective is set. An image G64 instructing (or prompting) an operation and an image G65 representing the operation effective period and the remaining time of the operation effective period are displayed.

  When the effect button 18A is pressed during the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 121 (c-1), the image G64 instructing (or prompting) the operation of the effect button 18A, and the operation effective period The image G65 indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period disappears, and a speech image G60 that suggests a big hit expectation is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) at a predetermined position corresponding to the specific character image G54. As shown in FIG. 81, in the present embodiment, there are three types of dialogue patterns displayed in the dialogue image G60: “...” “Chance” and “Hot I”, and the jackpot suggested by the dialogue pattern Expectations are higher in the order of "..." <"chance" <"hot". Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121 (d), the display of the specific character image G54 and the speech image G60 disappears.

  On the other hand, when the effect button 18A is not pressed during the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 121 (c-2), an image G64 that instructs (or prompts) the operation of the effect button 18A, and the operation effective The image G65 representing the period and the remaining time of the operation effective period disappears, the specific character image G54 remains displayed, and the speech image G60 is not displayed. Thereafter, as in the case where the effect button 18A is pressed, the display of the specific character image G54 disappears as shown in FIG. 121 (d).

  The second special notice effect described above is executed in a superimposed manner on the change effect. The second special notice effect suggesting the jackpot expectation is performed in the effect mode E but not in the effect mode A. Therefore, in the production mode E, the production suggesting the degree of jackpot expectation is executed more frequently than in the production mode A, so the jackpot 3 with a small profit is won, and the subsequent high probability gaming state and short-time game Even if the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state are finished without winning a jackpot in the state, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the variation effect pattern selection ratio in the effect mode A and the change effect pattern determination table in the effect mode E are different from each other. Specifically, the variation effect pattern determination table of the effect mode E is more accompanied by the operation of the effect button 18A than the change effect pattern determination table of the effect mode A (for example, a specific chance effect or a second special notice effect). And an effect accompanied by the movement of the movable part 17A and the movable part 17B of the effecting accessory device 17 (for example, the so-called gasse effect in which the movable part 17B swings but does not operate completely so that the development effect is executed). The selection ratio of the variation effect pattern to be performed is high. Such effects accompanying the movement of the movable part 17A and the movable part 17B often constitute a decision effect for notifying the winning of a jackpot, a development effect that develops to SPSP reach, which suggests that the expectation of the jackpot is high, and the like. Therefore, it can be said that the effect mode E is an effect mode in which an effect that wins a big win is easier to execute than the effect mode A. Such a production mode E is set after the end of the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state related to the jackpot 3, so that the winning jackpot 3 with a small profit is won, and even in the subsequent high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state Even if the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state are finished without winning a big hit, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the effect form of the second special notice effect is not limited to the present embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the second special notice effect, two characters may appear and have a conversation, and depending on the content, the expectation level of jackpot may be suggested. You may suggest the degree of expectation.
In the second special notice effect, the contents of the effect after the second special notice effect may be suggested. For example, a line “SP Reach” may be displayed to indicate that SP reach is to be executed after the end of the second special notice effect.

In the second special notice effect, the movable part 17B of the effect accessory device 17 may be moved. For example, the movable part 17B may be moved, and the lamp may be caused to emit light in accordance with the operation of the movable part 17B by the effect lighting device 16, and the expected degree of jackpot may be suggested by the emission color. In the second special notice effect, the movable portion 17B may be movable in several stages, and the expected degree of jackpot may be suggested depending on the movable stage.
Further, in the second special notice effect, the voice output device 15 may output the voice or sound effect of the specific character, and the degree of jackpot expectation may be suggested depending on the mode.

  In addition, the production mode (production mode E) that is set after the production mode B that has been set with a small profit as a trigger is not limited to the present embodiment, but is set with a large profit that has been set as a trigger. The effect mode may be different from the effect mode (effect mode A) set after the effect mode B is completed. For example, a mode in which a pre-reading effect is more easily executed than in other effect modes may be used, or a mode in which an effect to which a game privilege is given may be easily executed. This game privilege is a privilege that is not directly related to a game related to winning balls such as prize balls or special symbol determination or jackpot games. For example, a game privilege is composed of privilege points consisting of points such as 10 points and 30 points, and various contents can be acquired according to the points, or premium images can be obtained at a predetermined timing during the game. Settings such as displaying (still images and moving images) and playing original songs are possible.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a big hit that becomes an opportunity to be set in the production mode E, a small big hit (big hit 3) with a small profit of 4 round games is set. However, the jackpot that is set as the trigger for the presentation mode E is not limited to this, and the opening time of the big winning openings 8, 9 in the jackpot game related to the jackpot that is set as the trigger for the presentation mode E is changed to the presentation mode E. As long as it is set shorter than the opening time of the big winning openings 8 and 9 in the jackpot game related to the jackpot with a large profit that does not become an opportunity to be set, it can be set appropriately. In addition, although the jackpot that is set as the trigger for the production mode E is one type of “big jackpot 3”, a plurality of jackpot types that can be set as the trigger for the presentation mode E can be set.

  Moreover, in this Embodiment, when the special symbol fluctuation | variation display of each time is complete | finished, it determines with effect mode E completion | finish determination (step S1313-16) of whether the effect mode E is complete | finished, and complete | finishing. Then, the production mode E is ended. However, the end mode of the effect mode E is not limited to this, and after the effect mode E is set, the effect mode E is set to end when a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation displays are executed. You can also. In this case, the predetermined number of times can be set to one or a plurality. When a plurality of predetermined times are set, it is also possible to determine from a plurality of predetermined times by a predetermined lottery when the production mode E is set. Furthermore, when the third jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot 3 that is the trigger of the production mode E is being executed, the number of game balls that have entered the respective big winning holes 8, 9 or the number of winning balls that have been won It is also possible to set the end mode of the effect mode E so that it ends when a predetermined time elapses after the effect mode E is set.

(Second look-ahead production)
Next, the second prefetch effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 124 and FIGS. 125 to 127. The second look-ahead effect is a look-ahead effect that causes the second special figure reserved image to be displayed in a special manner based on the pre-determination result when the effect mode B which is the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state ends. Specifically, this is an effect of changing the display mode of the second special figure reserved image displayed at the end of the effect mode B from the second prefetch effect suggestion mode to the special mode (1 to 16).

  As shown in FIG. 122 (a), in the effect mode B, the 99th variation effect is started after the effect mode B is set, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are varied and displayed in the display area 140. In the first special figure hold display area 142, the first display section 142A of the first special figure hold display area 142 displays the first special figure hold image in the normal mode, and the first display section 143A of the second special figure hold display area 143 displays , It is assumed that the second special figure hold image in the normal mode is displayed and the change hold image is displayed in the change hold display area 141. Further, since it is the 99th variation effect, the effect mode remaining count image G73 indicates the remaining count “1”.

  Next, when one game ball enters the second start port 7 when the 99th variation effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 122 (b), the second special figure hold display area. The second special figure holding image of the second prefetching effect suggesting aspect is newly displayed on the second display unit 143B of 143.

  Here, the reason why the second special figure reservation image of the second prefetching effect suggesting aspect is displayed will be described. The variation effect performed when the second special figure reserved image of the second look-ahead effect suggestion mode is displayed is the 99th variation effect after the effect mode B is set, and the second look-ahead effect suggestion Since the number of second special figure reservations immediately before the second special figure reservation image of the aspect is displayed is one and the number of executions of the rendering mode B of this embodiment is 100, the second special figure reservation is held. The number of second special figure reservations corresponding to the second special figure reservation image newly displayed on the second display unit 143B of the display area 143 is 101. The second special figure hold with the number of winnings of “101” is a second special figure hold that is changed after the production mode B ends, and is a target hold for the second pre-reading production. Regardless, the second special figure reserved image with the character “?”, Which is the second prefetching effect suggesting mode, is displayed (see step S1304-6, step S1304-22, step S1304-23).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (c), the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 suggesting the loss are stopped and displayed, and the change hold image disappears.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (d), when the 100th variation effect is started after the effect mode B is set, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in a variable manner, and the second special figure hold display area is displayed. The second special figure hold image of the first display unit 143A of 143 moves to the variable hold display area 141, the second special figure hold image of the second display unit 143B moves to the first display unit 143A, and the production mode The remaining number of times image G73 is updated from “1” to “Last” indicating the last variation.

When three game balls enter the second start opening 7 while the variation effect is being performed, as shown in FIG. 122 (e), the second display portion of the second special figure holding display area 143 143B, the 3rd display part 143C, and the 4th display part 143D newly display the 2nd special figure reservation image of the 2nd prefetch effect suggestion aspect.
In addition, the prior determination result related to the second special figure reservation image displayed on the first display unit 143A is no reach (losing), and the preliminary determination related to the second special figure reservation image displayed on the second display unit 143B. The result is a jackpot, the pre-determined result relating to the second special figure hold image displayed on the third display unit 143C is SPSP reach, and the second special figure hold image displayed on the fourth display unit 143D. The pre-judgment result is assumed to be no reach (losing).

Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (f), when the variation effect is finished, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 indicating that the variation is lost are displayed and the variation pending image disappears.
Then, since the effect mode B ends when the change effect ends, the effect control board 102 transmits an effect mode B end effect control command to the image control board 105, and the image control board 105 receives from the effect control board 102. Based on the effect mode B end effect control command, the MMRUSH (name of effect mode B) is ended as shown in FIG. 122 (g) while the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped and displayed. The hail image G75 is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the top of the special figure holding image. Further, since the hail image G75 is displayed from above the special figure hold image, the special figure hold image cannot be seen while the hail image G75 is displayed.

In addition, the second prefetch determination process shown in FIGS. 52 and 53 is performed when the effect mode B ends.
As described above, since the second special figure hold whose jackpot determination result is a big hit is reserved, the special figure hold display special mode first determination table is selected, and further, the second special figure hold number reserved is determined. Since there are four, the special figure hold display special mode first determination table for the second special figure hold number of four is selected, the special figure hold display special mode determination is performed, and the second special figure hold display Special aspects are determined. Here, it is assumed that the special mode 15 is “good”, “machine”, “arrival”, “coming” (see steps S1314-3 and S1314-4).
In addition, the second special figure hold whose pre-judgment result is a big hit is not the oldest second special figure hold, and the display form of the second special figure hold is a special form (which indicates that the big win is confirmed) 4, 8, 12, 16), the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern determination table is selected, the special figure hold display special mode transition pattern determination is performed, and the second special figure hold image is shifted. Each time a special figure hold display special mode transition pattern for changing the color of the second special figure hold image is determined. Here, it is assumed that a pattern that changes from “white → blue → red → purple” is determined (see steps S1314-5, S1314-6, and steps S1314-19 to 23).

When the 100th variation effect is finished, the effect control board 102 transmits an effect mode effect control command to the image control board 105, and the image control board 105 receives the effect mode effect control received from the effect control board 102. Based on the command, the background image for effect mode B is switched to the background image for effect mode A while the haze image G75 is displayed. Furthermore, when the 100th variation effect ends, the effect control board 102 transmits a special figure hold effect control command to the image control board 105, and the image control board 105 receives the special figure hold received from the effect control board 102. Based on the effect control command, the display mode of the four second special figure holding images that were displayed in the second prefetch effect suggestion mode was determined in the second prefetch determination process until the bag image G75 was displayed. The special mode 15 is changed while the haze image G75 is displayed with reference to the data. In addition, after switching the background image and changing the display mode of the second special figure holding image, the image control board 105 hides the haze image G75 as shown in FIG. 122 (h).
Note that whether or not to change the second special figure hold display mode in the second prefetch determination process is that the prior determination result is reach among the reserved second special figure hold as described in step S1314-2. Judgment is made based on whether there is a second special figure hold. The second special figure hold that is the target of the second look-ahead effect is reach advance determination based on the second reach determination table as described in steps S246-12, S246-13, and S246-15. The ratio determined to be is set to 70%. Therefore, the second prefetching effect is performed with a high probability.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 123 (a), when the first variation effect is started after the effect mode A is set, the second special figure hold image of the first display unit 143A of the second special figure hold display area 143 is displayed. Moves to the variable hold display area 141, and the second special figure hold images of the second display unit 143B, the third display unit 143C, and the fourth display unit 143D move to the left display units and are displayed. All of the second special figure holding images displayed in the special mode are changed from white display to blue display.

Next, when the variation effect ends, as shown in FIG. 123 (b), the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 indicating the loss are stopped and the variation pending image disappears.
It should be noted that there is a game at the first start port 6 between the time when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in FIG. 123 (a) are displayed and the time when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in FIG. 123 (b) are stopped. A sphere enters and a first special figure reservation image is newly displayed on the second display portion 142B of the first special figure reservation display area 142. Since the first look-ahead effect is not performed while the special mode display is being performed on the second special figure hold image in the second special figure hold display area (see step S1304-20), a new entry is made by the entry. The displayed first special figure hold image is displayed in a normal manner regardless of the prior determination result.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 123 (c), when the next fluctuation effect is started, the second special figure hold image of the first display unit 143A of the second special figure hold display area 143 is displayed in the change hold display area 141. And the second special figure reserved images of the second display unit 143B and the third display unit 143C are moved to and displayed on the respective left display units and all the second special images displayed in a special manner are displayed. The figure hold image is changed from blue display to red display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 123 (d), a reach state is reached, and as shown in FIG. 123 (e), images of the teammate character A and the enemy character X are displayed, and it is informed that it will develop into SP reach. The SP reach where the ally character A and the enemy character X fight over time is executed.
During SP reach, the special figure reservation image is not displayed.

  After the SP reach is performed, as shown in FIG. 123 (f), the movable portion 17B of the effect accessory device 17 provided on the right side surface of the image display device 14 is moved and the "friend B participation" “Development effect” for displaying character images is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 123 (g), an image in which a new friend B has appeared is displayed, informing that it has developed into SPSP reach, and a friend character A, a friend character B, and an enemy character over a predetermined period of time. SPSP reach where X fights.
During SPSP reach, the special figure reservation image is not displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (h), the stop symbols of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 indicating the big win are displayed, and the change hold image disappears.
At this time, since the SPSP reach is completed, the special figure hold image is displayed again.

Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (a), an opening effect indicating the opening of the jackpot game is executed.
Note that the special figure hold image is again hidden when the jackpot game is started.

  Thereafter, the predetermined round is completed, and an ending effect indicating the ending of the jackpot game is executed as shown in FIG. 124 (b).

Then, when the ending effect ends, as shown in FIG. 124C, a “MMRUSH rush” character image indicating that the effect mode B is set is displayed.
Note that the special figure hold image is displayed again by the end of the jackpot game, but the second special figure hold image that was displayed in the special mode before the jackpot game is started is changed to the normal mode. Will be displayed (see step S1319-3, step S1319-4).

  Next, another example of the second prefetch effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 127.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (a), in the effect mode B, the 99th variation effect is started after the effect mode B is set, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are varied in the display area 140. In the first special figure hold display area 142, the first display section 142A of the first special figure hold display area 142 displays the first special figure hold image in the normal mode, and the first display section 143A of the second special figure hold display area 143 displays , It is assumed that the second special figure hold image in the normal mode is displayed and the change hold image is displayed in the change hold display area 141. Further, since it is the 99th variation effect, the effect mode remaining count image G73 indicates the remaining count “1”.

  Next, when one game ball enters the second start port 7 during the 99th variation effect, as shown in FIG. 125 (b), the second display in the second special figure hold display area 143 is displayed. The second special figure reserved image in the second prefetching effect suggesting aspect is newly displayed on the part 143B.

  Here, the reason why the second special figure reservation image of the second prefetching effect suggesting aspect is displayed will be described. The variation effect performed when the second special figure reserved image of the second look-ahead effect suggestion mode is displayed is the 99th change effect after the effect mode B is set. Since the number of second special figure reservations immediately before the second special figure reservation image is displayed is one and the number of executions of the rendering mode B of this embodiment is 100, the second special figure reservation display area The number of winnings in the second special figure holding corresponding to the second special figure holding image newly displayed in the second display unit 143B of 143 is 101. The special figure hold with the number of winnings of “101” is a second special figure hold that is changed after the production mode B ends, and is a target hold for the second pre-reading production. The second special figure holding image with the character “?”, Which is the second look-ahead effect suggesting mode, is displayed (see step S1304-6, step S1304-22, step S1304-23).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125 (c), the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 suggesting the loss are stopped and displayed, and the variation pending image disappears.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (d), when the 100th variation effect is started after the effect mode B is set, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in a variable manner, and the second special figure hold display area. The second special figure hold image of the first display unit 143A of 143 moves to the variable hold display area 141, the second special figure hold image of the second display unit 143B moves to the first display unit 143A, and the production mode The remaining number of times image G73 is updated from “1” to “Last” indicating the last variation.

When two game balls enter the second start port 7 while the variation effect is being performed, as shown in FIG. 125 (e), the second display portion of the second special figure holding display area 143 is displayed. 143B and the 3rd display part 143C newly display the 2nd special figure reservation image of the 2nd prefetch effect suggestion aspect.
In addition, the prior determination result related to the second special figure reservation image displayed on the first display unit 143A is SPSP reach (losing), and the preliminary determination related to the second special figure reservation image displayed on the second display unit 143B. It is assumed that the result is no reach (loss), and the prior determination result related to the second special figure holding image displayed on the third display unit 143C is SP reach (loss).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125 (f), when the variation effect is finished, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 indicating that it is lost are displayed and the variation pending image disappears.
Then, since the effect mode B ends when the change effect ends, the effect control board 102 transmits an effect mode B end effect control command to the image control board 105, and the image control board 105 receives from the effect control board 102. As shown in FIG. 125 (g), MMRUSH (name of effect mode B) is ended while effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped and displayed based on the effect mode B end effect control command. The hail image G75 is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the top of the special figure holding image. Further, since the hail image G75 is displayed from above the special figure hold image, the special figure hold image cannot be seen while the hail image G75 is displayed.

Also, the second prefetch determination process shown in FIGS. 52 and 53 is performed when the effect mode B is ended.
As described above, the second special figure hold whose pre-determination result is SPSP reach (losing) is retained in the first display unit 143A, and the second special figure hold whose pre-determination result is no reach (lack) is second displayed. Since the second special figure hold that is reserved in the part 143B and the prior determination result is SP reach (losing) is reserved in the third display part 143C, the special figure hold display special mode third determination table is selected, and Since the number of reserved second special figure reservations is 3, the special figure hold display special mode third determination table for the second special figure hold number of 3 is selected, and the special figure hold display special mode is selected. A determination is made and the special mode of the second special figure hold display is determined. Here, it is assumed that “ordinary”, “large”, and “relative”, which are special modes 10, are determined (see Steps S1314-1 and S1314-1).

When the 100th variation effect is finished, the effect control board 102 transmits an effect mode effect control command to the image control board 105, and the image control board 105 receives the effect mode effect control received from the effect control board 102. Based on the command, the background image for effect mode B is switched to the background image for effect mode A while the haze image G75 is displayed. Further, the effect control board 102 transmits a special figure hold effect control command to the image control board 105, and the image control board 105 generates a habit image G75 based on the special figure hold effect control command received from the effect control board 102. Until the image is displayed, the display mode of the three second special figure reserved images that have been displayed in the second prefetch effect suggestion mode is displayed with reference to the data determined in the second prefetch determination process. While being done, the special mode 10 is changed. In addition, after switching the background image and changing the display mode of the second special figure holding image, the image control board 105 hides the haze image G75 as shown in FIG. 125 (h).
Note that whether or not to change the second special figure hold display mode in the second prefetch determination process is that the prior determination result is reach among the reserved second special figure hold as described in step S1314-2. Judgment is made based on whether there is a second special figure hold. The second special figure hold that is the target of the second look-ahead effect is reach advance determination based on the second reach determination table as described in steps S246-12, S246-13, and S246-15. The ratio determined to be is set to 70%. Therefore, the second prefetching effect is performed with a high probability.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (a), when the production mode A is set and the first variation production is started, the second special figure hold image of the first display unit 143A of the second special figure hold display area 143 is displayed. Moves to the variable hold display area 141, and the second special figure hold images of the second display portion 143B and the third display portion 143C move to the left display portions and are displayed.

  When one game ball enters the second start port 7 while the variation effect is being performed, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), the third display portion of the second special figure hold display area 143 is displayed. A second special figure holding image is newly displayed at 143C. Since the first pre-reading effect is not performed while the special mode display is being performed on the second special figure hold image in the second special figure hold display area 143 (see step S1304-20), The newly displayed second special figure holding image is displayed in the normal mode regardless of the prior determination result.

Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (c), a reach state is reached, and as shown in FIG. 126 (d), images of the teammate character A and the enemy character X are displayed, and it is informed that it will develop into SP reach. The SP reach where the ally character A and the enemy character X fight over time is executed.
During SP reach, the special figure reservation image is not displayed.

  After the SP reach is performed, as shown in FIG. 126 (e), the movable portion 17B of the effect accessory device 17 provided on the right side surface of the image display device 14 is moved and the "friend B participation" “Development effect” for displaying character images is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (f), an image in which a new friend B has appeared is displayed, informing that it has developed into SPSP reach, and for a predetermined period of time, the friend character A, the friend character B, and the enemy character SPSP reach where X fights.
During SPSP reach, the special figure reservation image is not displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (g), the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 indicating the loss are displayed and the change hold image disappears.
At this time, since the SPSP reach is completed, the special figure hold image is displayed again.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (h), when the next variation effect is started, the second special figure hold image of the first display unit 143A of the second special figure hold display area 143 is displayed in the change hold display area 141. The second special figure reserved images on the second display unit 143B and the third display unit 143C are moved and displayed on the left display units.

  Next, when the variation effect ends, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 indicating the loss are stopped and the variation pending image disappears.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), when the next fluctuation effect is started, the second special figure hold image of the first display unit 143A of the second special figure hold display area 143 is displayed in the change hold display area 141. The second special figure holding image of the second display unit 143B is moved to the first display unit 143A and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (c), a reach state is reached, and as shown in FIG. 127 (d), images of the teammate character A and the enemy character X are displayed, and the development to SP reach is notified, The SP reach where the ally character A and the enemy character X fight over time is executed.
During the SP reach, the special figure reservation image is again hidden.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 127 (e), the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 indicating the loss are displayed and the change hold image disappears.
At this time, since the SP reach has ended, the special figure hold image is displayed again.

  As described above, when the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state are finished, the contents of the second prefetch effect produced by the change of the display mode of the second special figure reserved image from the second prefetch effect suggestion mode to the special mode However, the second reach determination table is used in the reach determination for the second special figure hold related to the second prefetch effect, and the second special figure hold is not used for the second prefetch effect (related to the first prefetch effect). In the reach determination for the first special figure hold, the first reach determination table is used. The reach determination using the second reach determination table is more easily determined when the reach effect is executed than the reach determination using the first reach determination table. As a result, it is easier to determine that the second prefetch effect is executed than the first prefetch effect (FIGS. 5 (b-1) and (b-2), steps S246-13 to S246-15). In this way, in the predetermined period after the second special figure hold that triggers the termination of the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state (when the special figure determination information is acquired), in a period other than the predetermined period Compared to the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the player will be discouraged and the player's willingness to play will be reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the second look-ahead effect is executed after the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state related to the second pre-reading effect are finished, but before the high-probability gaming state and the time-short gaming state are finished. It is also possible to execute.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the second prefetching effect and the contents of the second prefetching effect are generated in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state related to the second pre-reading effect. It is executed for all of the second special figure hold that is digested after the game state and the short-time game state are finished, but can also be executed for all of the second special figure hold. . For example, in the high probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, every time the second special figure hold that is digested after the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state ends, 2. It is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, and when it is determined to execute, the display mode of the second special figure reserved image is changed to a display mode different from the display mode related to the first pre-reading effect. You can also. In addition, each time the second special figure hold generated in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state is digested after the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state is completed, It is determined whether or not to execute the second prefetch effect, and if it is determined to be executed, the display mode of the second special figure reserved image is changed to a display mode different from the display mode related to the first prefetch effect. It can also be done.

  In addition, the production mode of the second prefetching production is not limited to this embodiment, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the second look-ahead effect can be performed using not the second special figure reserved image but the change display of the effect symbol constituting the change effect and the background image. Furthermore, each time the second special figure hold generated in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state related to the second pre-reading effect is digested after the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state are completed, the production modes A to A A cut-in image that is not displayed in the effect mode E is displayed, a sound effect that is not output in the effect mode A to the effect mode E, or an operation of the movable portion 17A and the movable portion 17B that is not performed in the effect mode A to the effect mode E. Two prefetching effects can also be performed. In this case, a plurality of types of cut-in images, sound effects, or operations of the movable portion 17A and the movable portion 17B are set, and the jackpot expectation can be set differently depending on the types.

  In addition to the timing when the second look-ahead effect is executed, the second special figure hold generated in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state is digested after the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state ends. Also, it can be set at a predetermined time in the variation effect such as when the reach state is established in the variation effect related to the second special figure hold.

  In the present embodiment, the second look-ahead effect is executed in response to the end of the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state. However, the second pre-reading effect is triggered by the end of the gaming state advantageous to the player compared to the normal gaming state. Therefore, it may be performed when the “high probability gaming state and non-short-time gaming state” end, or may be performed when the “low probability gaming state and time-short gaming state” ends. However, it may be performed in all of them.

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol reserved storage area is shifted with priority over the first special symbol reserved storage area (see steps S310-2 to S310-6). The second special symbol hold storage area was shifted in the order in which the game balls entered the start ports 6 and 7 in the order in which the second special figure hold was performed. The second look-ahead effect may be performed using both the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the high probability state and the short time state related to the effect mode B are set based on the game ball passing through the specific area 12 in the jackpot game, and the low probability state and the short time state related to the effect mode C. The state is set based on the fact that the game ball does not pass through the specific area 12 in the jackpot game, but this high probability state, short-time state, low probability state and short-time state are the passing of the specific area 12 of the game ball. Regardless, the jackpot game can be set based on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the effect mode B. However, the pseudo-continuous effect that is displayed again after the variably displayed effect symbol is temporarily stopped is displayed in the effect mode remaining number display. It can also be performed in the production modes A and D that are not displayed and other production modes C in which the remaining number of production modes are displayed. In this case, the pseudo-continuous production can be provided with a pseudo-continuous level like a specific pseudo-continuous production related to the first special notice production, or can be omitted. In addition, when performing a pseudo-continuous effect in an effect mode other than the effect mode B, all or all of the elements of the pseudo-continuous effect (effect pattern used, variable display mode, variable time, temporary stop mode, temporary stop time, etc.) A part of them can be set to be the same as any one of pseudo-continuous level 1 to pseudo-continuous level 5, or can be set to be different from any of them. Furthermore, also in the effect mode B, a pseudo-continuous effect having a different form from the specific pseudo-continuous effect related to the first special notice effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect in which no pseudo-continuous level is provided, or a set pseudo-effect. It is also possible to execute (pseudo-continuous productions) with different development modes of production according to the continuous level and the pseudo-continuous level.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can be used for a gaming machine using a gaming ball such as a Jiyan ball gaming machine or an arrangement ball gaming machine.

Y gaming machine 6 1st start opening 6a 1st start opening detection sensor 7 2nd start opening 7a 2nd start opening detection sensor 8 1st grand prize opening 9 2nd big prize opening 10 winning gate 12 specific area 14 image display device ( Display means)
18 effect button device 70 second start port control device 80 first big prize port control device 90 second big prize port control device 101 main control board 101a main CPU (game data acquisition means, special game judgment means, pre-judgment means, special (Game control means, specific game state setting means, specific game state end means)
101b Main ROM
101c main RAM (game data storage means)
102 effect control board 102a sub CPU (variable device control means, notice effect control means)
102b Sub ROM
102c Sub RAM

Claims (1)

Game data acquisition means for acquiring game data triggered by the establishment of the start condition;
Game data storage means for storing game data acquired by the game data acquisition means;
Special game determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game that gives a predetermined profit to a player based on the game data stored in the game data storage means when the determination condition is satisfied; ,
Prior determination means for determining in advance whether or not to perform the special game based on the game data acquired by the game data acquisition means before the determination condition is satisfied;
When the determination by the special game determination unit is performed, the display unit performs variable display of the identification symbol, and the variable display control unit performs the stop display of the identification symbol indicating the result of the determination;
Based on the result of the determination by the prior determination means, a notice effect control means for performing a notice effect that suggests performing the special game;
A special game control means for performing the special game when the identification symbol indicating the result of the determination to perform the special game is displayed;
Specific game state setting means for setting a specific game state advantageous to the player as compared with the normal game state after the end of the special game;
Specific game state ending means for ending the specific game state when the number of times that the variable display control means has performed the variable display of the identification symbol reaches a predetermined number in the specific game state,
The notice effect control means includes:
The notice effect is executed with a higher probability in a predetermined period after the stop of the variable display of the identification symbol that triggers the specific gaming state to be ended by the specific gaming state ending means, compared to a period other than the predetermined period. possible der is,
In a period other than the predetermined period, the first notice effect is executed, while in the predetermined period, a second notice effect that is different from the first notice effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.